Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 1 (PSS-1) | Release 1.7.0
MD4H EDGE DEVICE USER GUIDE
8DG60418MAAA
Issue 3 | November 2012
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."
Contents
About this document
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi
Reason for reissue ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi
Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii
How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................. xxiixxii
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A .............................................................................. xxiiixxiii
Conventions used ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxivxxiv
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxivxxiv
User interface to system ......................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv
Using procedures ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv
Information product support ................................................................................................................................................ xxvixxvi
Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi
How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxvixxvi
Training ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi
Packaging collection and recovery requirements ....................................................................................................... xxviixxvii
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ....................................................................................................................... xxviixxvii
How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii
1 Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-21-2
General notes on safety ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-41-4
Laser safety ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-61-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
iii
Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-111-11
Save these safety instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-131-13
2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-22-2
Hardware design and layout .................................................................................................................................................. 2-42-4
Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-122-12
Multiservice muxponder ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-182-18
Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-222-22
Topologies ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-272-27
CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management ............................................................................................................ 2-302-30
Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-332-33
Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-382-38
Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-412-41
Status Retrieval ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-452-45
System access .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-462-46
Synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-472-47
Reliability program ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-492-49
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-632-63
Technical specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-772-77
3 Installation and System turn up
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1
Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33-3
Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ............................................................ 3-63-6
Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ............................................................... 3-113-11
Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device .......................................... 3-123-12
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................... 3-203-20
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal ...................................................................................................................................... 3-223-22
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs ....................................................................................................... 3-233-23
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................... 3-243-24
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................... 3-293-29
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load; commit the software ................................... 3-313-31
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ............................................................................................... 3-373-37
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address ............................................................................................................... 3-383-38
Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port ................................................................................................. 3-393-39
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time .......................................................................................... 3-403-40
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................. 3-413-41
Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties ........................................................................................ 3-423-42
Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system access ........................................................................ 3-433-43
Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links ............................................................................................................... 3-503-50
Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning ................................................................................................................ 3-513-51
Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server ............................................................................................ 3-523-52
4 User Operations Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ......................... 4-24-2
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning ........................................................................ 4-44-4
Procedure 4-3: Software installation .................................................................................................................................. 4-54-5
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision .................................... 4-64-6
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning ........................................................................................................................................ 4-94-9
Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup ................................................................................................................................ 4-114-11
Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 4-124-12
Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation ......................................................................................................... 4-144-14
Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................. 4-154-15
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
v
Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................ 4-184-18
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................. 4-194-19
Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement ................................................................................................................. 4-204-20
Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement .................................................................................................................... 4-234-23
5 Security administration
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1
User accounts and privileges ................................................................................................................................................ 5-25-2
Configuring user accounts ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-65-6
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts ............................................................................................ 5-105-10
Login sessions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-135-13
System security features ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-155-15
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-195-19
Authentication ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-205-20
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................. 5-245-24
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures .................................................................................................................................... 5-265-26
6 Alarm List
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1
BDI ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-46-4
BDIODU ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-56-5
CARDINIT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-66-6
CONTCOM ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-76-7
DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-86-8
DBFL ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-96-9
DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-106-10
DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-116-11
DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-126-12
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-136-13
ETR-MISMATCH (card) ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-146-14
FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-156-15
FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-166-16
FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-176-17
FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-186-18
FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19
FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-206-20
FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-216-21
INTTEMP [over] .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-226-22
INTTEMP [under] .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-236-23
LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-246-24
LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-256-25
LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-266-26
LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-276-27
LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-286-28
LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-296-29
LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-306-30
LOFEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-326-32
LOM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-336-33
LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-346-34
LOS-P ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-356-35
LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-366-36
LPBKTERM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-376-37
MAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-386-38
MANWKSWBK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-406-40
MANWKSWPR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-416-41
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
vii
MISMATCH ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-426-42
NET ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-436-43
OCI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-446-44
PLM ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-456-45
PRCDRERR-TOPO .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-466-46
PWR ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-476-47
REPLUNITMISS ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-486-48
REPLUNITMISSMOD ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-496-49
SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-506-50
SSFODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-516-51
SWFTDWN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-526-52
SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-536-53
TIM .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-546-54
TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-556-55
TRMT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-566-56
UNKNOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-576-57
UPM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-596-59
USALS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-606-60
VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-616-61
VOLTAGE[low] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-626-62
WKSWPR ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-636-63
7 Alarm Clearing Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1
BDI ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-47-4
BDIODU ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57-5
CARDINIT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-67-6
CONTCOM ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-77-7
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-97-9
DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-117-11
DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-127-12
DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-137-13
DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-157-15
EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-177-17
ETR-MISMATCH (card) ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-197-19
FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-217-21
FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-237-23
FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-247-24
FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-257-25
FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-267-26
FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-277-27
FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-287-28
INTEMP [over] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-297-29
INTEMP [under] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-317-31
LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-327-32
LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-337-33
LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-347-34
LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-357-35
LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-367-36
LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-397-39
LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-417-41
LOFEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-457-45
LOM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-467-46
LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-487-48
LOS-P ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-547-54
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
ix
LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-567-56
LPBKTERM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-577-57
MAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-587-58
MANWKSWBK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-607-60
MANWKSWPR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-617-61
MISMATCH ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-627-62
NET ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-647-64
OCI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-657-65
PLM ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-667-66
PRCDRERR-TOPO .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-677-67
PWR ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-697-69
REPLUNTMISS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-717-71
REPLUNITMISSMOD ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-737-73
SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-757-75
SSFODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-777-77
SWFTDWN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-797-79
SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-807-80
TIM .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-857-85
TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-887-88
TRMT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-907-90
UNKNOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-927-92
UPM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-957-95
USALS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-967-96
VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-987-98
VOLTAGE[low] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-997-99
WKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1007-100
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
8 Supporting Procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1
Determining the far end of a service .................................................................................................................................. 8-28-2
Performing loopbacks ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-38-3
Path power trace ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-48-4
Glossary
Index
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
List of tables
1 Chapter contents ....................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii
2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported ...................................................................................... 2-142-14
2-2 Client signal time slot requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-192-19
2-3 Supported loopbacks .............................................................................................................................................. 2-382-38
2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring ........................................................................................................................... 2-412-41
2-5 PCS PM parameter definitions ........................................................................................................................... 2-422-42
2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a controlled environment .. 2-502-50
2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an uncontrolled environment
............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-532-532-53
2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees ....................................................... 2-632-63
2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs ................................................................................................................................................ 2-642-64
2-10 1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment ........................................................................................................ 2-722-72
2-11 1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits ................................................................................................................. 2-732-73
2-12 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items ................................................................................. 2-742-74
2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment ............................................................................................. 2-742-74
2-14 Power filter input specifications ........................................................................................................................ 2-772-77
2-15 SFP specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 2-782-78
2-16 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 2-882-88
2-17 SFC2 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 2-882-88
2-18 SFC4 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 2-882-88
2-19 SFC8 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 2-882-88
3-1 Office power connection and cable color ....................................................................................................... 3-143-14
3-2 Test and expected results ...................................................................................................................................... 3-153-15
3-3 Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 3-173-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xiii
3-4 Shelf ID and Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 3-183-18
4-1 PC and software requirements .............................................................................................................................. 4-44-4
4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors ................................................................................................... 4-154-15
5-1 User privilege levels ................................................................................................................................................. 5-35-3
7-1 Software upgrade status and actions ................................................................................................................ 7-807-80
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
List of figures
2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device showing Dimensions ............................................................................. 2-62-6
2-2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with the Cover .......................................................................................... 2-72-7
2-3 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device- Descriptive View ................................................................................... 2-82-8
2-4 PSS-1 MD4H physical layout ............................................................................................................................... 2-82-8
2-5 PSS-1 MD4H logical slot numbers .................................................................................................................. 2-102-10
2-6 Add/Drop operational mode ................................................................................................................................ 2-182-18
2-7 CROSSREGEN operational mode .................................................................................................................... 2-192-19
2-8 PSS1MD4 Client signal mapping examples ................................................................................................. 2-212-21
2-9 4 channel terminal node ........................................................................................................................................ 2-222-22
2-10 CWDM bus node ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-222-22
2-11 (E)SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections ................................................................................................... 2-242-24
2-12 (E)SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections ................................................................................................... 2-242-24
2-13 (E)SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections ...................................................................................................... 2-252-25
2-14 PSS-1 bidirectional 2-degree OADM .............................................................................................................. 2-262-26
2-15 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration .................................................................................................. 2-262-26
2-16 Single channel point-to-point (OTU-1 capacity) ........................................................................................ 2-272-27
2-17 CWDM point-to-point (up to 21.6Gb capacity with 8 OTU-1 channels) .......................................... 2-272-27
2-18 Bidirectional single fiber linear nodes ............................................................................................................. 2-282-28
2-19 Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core network for multiservice
back hauling. .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-292-29
2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example .............................................................................................. 2-342-34
2-21 E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT .................................................................................................................................. 2-352-35
2-22 Loopback access points ........................................................................................................................................ 2-402-40
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xv
2-23 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 30 Day
Lead Time for packs in a controlled environment ................................................................................... 2-572-57
2-24 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 30 Day
Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled environment ............................................................................ 2-582-58
2-25 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 60 Day
Lead Time for packs in a controlled environment ................................................................................... 2-592-59
2-26 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 60 Day
Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled environment ............................................................................ 2-602-60
2-27 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 90 Day
Lead Time for circuit packs in a controlled environment ..................................................................... 2-612-61
2-28 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 90 Day
Lead Time for circuit packs in an uncontrolled environment .............................................................. 2-622-62
3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings ....................................................................................................... 3-53-5
3-2 Marking initial mounting screw location .......................................................................................................... 3-73-7
3-3 Initial mounting screw placement ........................................................................................................................ 3-73-7
3-4 Hanging vertical mounting bracket for alignment ......................................................................................... 3-83-8
3-5 Marking screw placement for vertical mounting bracket ........................................................................... 3-83-8
3-6 Securing all mounting screws ............................................................................................................................... 3-93-9
3-7 Placement of unit in vertical mounting bracket .............................................................................................. 3-93-9
3-8 Securing unit in vertical mounting bracket .................................................................................................... 3-103-10
3-9 Bay frame bracket installation ............................................................................................................................ 3-113-11
3-10 Rear ground attachment points ........................................................................................................................... 3-133-13
3-11 Power Cable .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-153-15
3-12 Power cables installed ........................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16
3-13 Half size pack adapter ........................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16
3-14 Filter pack installed ................................................................................................................................................ 3-173-17
3-15 Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-183-18
3-16 Fibers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19
3-17 Push in wedge ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-18 Pull out SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-213-21
3-19 LC fiber tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-223-22
3-20 PC command window ........................................................................................................................................... 3-253-25
3-21 Login Screen ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-263-26
3-22 WebUI uninitialized database warning ............................................................................................................ 3-273-27
3-23 WebUI NE name prompt ...................................................................................................................................... 3-283-28
3-24 WebUI NE restart progress window ................................................................................................................. 3-283-28
3-25 Windows Firewall settings ................................................................................................................................... 3-323-32
3-26 WebUI Lan1 port provisioning .......................................................................................................................... 3-443-44
3-27 WebUI IP routes menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-453-45
3-28 WebUI IP routes window ..................................................................................................................................... 3-463-46
3-29 WebUI Create IP route window ......................................................................................................................... 3-473-47
3-30 WebUI IP routes window with new route ...................................................................................................... 3-483-48
3-31 FileZilla connect to server screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-533-53
3-32 FileZilla server screen ........................................................................................................................................... 3-543-54
3-33 FileZilla groups menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-553-55
3-34 FileZilla add group screen ................................................................................................................................... 3-563-56
3-35 FileZilla groups shared folders screen ............................................................................................................. 3-573-57
3-36 FileZilla browse folder screen ............................................................................................................................ 3-583-58
3-37 FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-593-59
3-38 FileZilla users screen ............................................................................................................................................. 3-603-60
3-39 FileZilla add user screen ....................................................................................................................................... 3-613-61
3-40 FileZilla users shared folders screen ................................................................................................................ 3-623-62
3-41 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 3-633-63
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xvii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
List of procedures
3 Installation and System turn up
3-1 Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ........................................................................... 3-63-6
3-2 Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device .............................................................................. 3-113-11
3-3 Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ......................................................... 3-123-12
3-4 SFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20
3-5 LC fiber removal ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-223-22
3-6 Verify installation and seat packs ...................................................................................................................... 3-233-23
3-7 Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................................... 3-243-24
3-8 Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................................... 3-293-29
3-9 Configure the software environment and load; commit the software .................................................. 3-313-31
3-10 Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................. 3-373-37
3-11 Set the loopback IP address ................................................................................................................................. 3-383-38
3-12 Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port ................................................................................................................... 3-393-39
3-13 Set the network element date and time ............................................................................................................ 3-403-40
3-14 Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................................... 3-413-41
3-15 Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................... 3-423-42
3-16 Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................... 3-433-43
3-17 Configure topological links ................................................................................................................................. 3-503-50
3-18 Verify system provisioning .................................................................................................................................. 3-513-51
3-19 Example configuration of FTP server .............................................................................................................. 3-523-52
4 User Operations Procedures
4-1 Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ........................................ 4-24-2
4-2 Personal computer requirements and provisioning ....................................................................................... 4-44-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xix
4-3 Software installation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-54-5
4-4 Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision ................................................... 4-64-6
4-5 Port Provisioning ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-94-9
4-6 GCC network setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4-114-11
4-7 TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-124-12
4-8 Provisioning for ETR operation ......................................................................................................................... 4-144-14
4-9 Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................ 4-154-15
4-10 Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................................. 4-184-18
4-11 Cleaning other optical components .................................................................................................................. 4-194-19
4-12 In-service fan replacement ................................................................................................................................... 4-204-20
4-13 Fan air filter replacement ..................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23
5 Security administration
5-1 Procedures to configure user accounts ........................................................................................................... 5-105-10
5-2 View security log procedure ................................................................................................................................ 5-195-19
5-3 RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................................. 5-245-24
5-4 SNMP procedures ................................................................................................................................................... 5-265-26
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
About this documentAbout this document
Purpose
This User Guide provides information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. This
“hardened” device is engineered to operate in environments that experience extended
temperature ranges (-25°C to +65°C).
Included in this guide is information on hardware, features, applications, and ordering as
well as detailed procedural information and commands for installation, maintenance,
trouble clearing, and turn-up of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
Reason for reissue
This document is being revised to include information about the new features in Release
1.7.
New Features for PSS-1 MD4H Release 1.7.0
Release 1.7.0 of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device includes the following new features:
• Threshold Crossing Alarm:
Threshold crossing alarms are implemented as standing conditions (ETSI Model)
• Provisionable GCC0 encapsulation mode:
Provisionable support is provided for legacy ITU-T G.7712 non-compliant GCC
processing, and G.7712 compliant GCC processing, to ensure interworking between
PSS-1 MD4H and 1830 PSS OTs.
• Support of G.823 wander specification for STM1/4 signal transport for
synchronization distribution across STM-1/4
• Secure Socket Layer (SSL) support on WEBUI, using SSL v3, based on the Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES)
This document is reissued as Issue 3 to include updates to the XFP/SFP supported list in
the Ordering and Technical Specifications section of Chapter 2, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xxi
Intended audience
This document is intended for the following users of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
documentation library:
• Network planners
• Administrators
• Operators
• Maintenance personnel
1830 PSS Edge Device products are meant to be installed, operated, and maintained by
personnel who have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to safely perform
the tasks assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures contained in the
1830 PSS Edge Device product documentation are intended for use by trained and
qualified personnel.
How to use this information product
This User Guide includes installation, procedures, and supporting information , such as
Safety instructions, Product overview, Installation and Provisioning, User Operations
Procedures , Glossary, and Index.
Assumptions
This document assumes that users have an understanding of the following:
• Basic principles of telecommunication transmission
• Common telecommunication and system terminology (a glossary is provided in this
manual to assist you)
• Test sets and tools used in the telecommunication industry
• Local operations and functional procedures of your company
• Personal computer (PC) operation, and common PC terminologies.
Chapter contents
Table 1 Chapter contents
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1, Safety This chapter provides important safety
instructions for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device
Chapter 2, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device This chapter provides details about the
features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device including applications, physical
descriptions, maintenance and loopbacks,
cross-connection information, technical
specifications, and ordering information.
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 1 Chapter contents (continued)
Chapter 3, Installation and Provisioning This chapter provides details about the
installation for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device, physical mounting, cabling,
powering, and provisioning.
Chapter 4, User Operations Procedures This chapter provides procedures to
provision features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
Chapter 5, Alarm List This chapter provides alarms and alarm
description
Chapter 6, Alarm Clearing Procedures This chapter contains the trouble-clearing
procedures required to clear the conditions
for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
Chapter 7, Supporting Procedures This chapter lists the troubleshooting
procedures for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device that are used in more than one
trouble-clearing procedure.
Glossary Defines terms used throughout the 1830
PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device documentation.
Index Provides detailed access to the contents of
this document.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at the user's expense.
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xxiii
Conventions used
The following typographical conventions are used throughout this document:
• Bold is used to identify CIT menu selections and button selections.
• Italic is used to identify NE messages
• Computer voice is used to identify system message text displayed by the CIT
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device User Guide is part of a set of
documents that support the 1830 PSS-32 system. The following items are available:
Document Number Document Title
8DG60418 AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16
(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and
Planning Guide
8DG60418 BAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16
(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 User Provisioning Guide
8DG60418 CAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16
(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG60418 FAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release
3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide
8DG60418 EAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release
3.0.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide
8DG60418 DAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16
(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide
8DG60418 HAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release
3.0.0 Safety Guide
8DG60418 GAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release
3.0.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide
3AL61305 AAAA 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.0 Photonic Manager EMS Reference
Guide
8DG60148 KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release
1.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide
8DG60418 LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release
2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide
8DG60386 JAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release
1.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Document Number Document Title
8DG60013 MAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA
Release 2.0.0 User Guide
8DG60420 AAAA 1830 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Product Family
Release 3.0.0 CD-ROM1
Notes:
1. This CD does not include the EPT User Guide. This is published on separate media.
User interface to system
Users interact with 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device using a Personal Computer (PC),
which permits users to perform system operations such as administration, provisioning,
fault management, and more.
Using the PC interface
Procedures presented in this document expect users to be familiar with the PC and
navigating through the screens of information relating to a particular operation. The
screens are designed to be straightforward and to contain all information relating to a
particular operation. The procedures presented in this document rely on the information
provided in the screen displays. Therefore, it is imperative that users read all the
information provided in a screen before continuing an operational function.
Using procedures
To find instructions for performing a specific job, find the procedure in the chapter
Contents table.
Procedures contain step-by-step instructions to accomplish a distinct user function.
Supporting procedures are referenced from multiple procedures to support a job function
you are performing. Go to a supporting procedure only when it is referred to by another
procedure. Supporting procedures are not to be accessed directly except by very
experienced personnel.
Important! Perform all steps in a procedure sequentially, unless that step sends you to
another step or procedure.
Unless otherwise instructed, if one procedure sends you to another procedure, you
must return to the first procedure after you complete the second. After you have
completed the first procedure, you have finished.
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xxv
If/Then statements in a procedure
If / Then ... columns in a procedure contain only one condition that is true in a table cell
under the If ... column. You perform the action in the related table cell under the Then ...
column. You then continue to the next sequential step or as directed by the action under
the Then ... column.
Verifying actions
Sometimes you will be asked to verify that actions have occurred. This may take the form
of a formal statement of the expected response. At other times, the instructions will
merely state that the user should verify an action or response to an action. If the expected
response is not observed and a specific trouble-clearing reference is not made, you should
reference Chapter 7, “Alarm Clearing Procedures” to start trouble clearing.
Information product support
Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a nontechnical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and
select your country from the pulldown menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone
and Email Contact Information".
How to order
Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatel-lucent.
com and select your product from the pulldown menu under "Technical Content for".
Training
This document expects a user to be familiar with the basic functions of the system before
performing procedures that could damage the system, affect system operations, or impede
communication traffic within the system. Understanding the descriptive material provided
in this manual should allow you to perform the procedures necessary to operate and
maintain 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent Training web-site training.alcatel-lucent.com for descriptions
of training courses available.
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field
Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
Recycling/take-back/disposal of product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the
market within the European Union (EU), shall be collected and treated at the end of their
useful life in compliance with applicable EU and local legislation. They shall not be
disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained
in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may
be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the EU, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the
product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of
Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to
provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent
equipment.
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
xxvii
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1 1Safety
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides important safety instructions for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device.
Contents
Structure of safety statements 1-2
General notes on safety 1-4
Laser safety 1-6
Electrostatic discharge 1-11
Save these safety instructions 1-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-1
Structure of safety statements
Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
SAMPLEB C D
E F
G
H
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injurydue to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transportand position this equipment. [ABC123]
CAUTION
Lifting hazard
Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning
DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-3
General notes on safety
Overview
All responsible technical personnel must read this chapter before servicing the system.
Always keep the most recent issue of this document close to the equipment.
In addition to the general safety instructions in this chapter, users must also observe the
specific safety instructions in the individual chapters.
The equipment complies with the current national and international safety requirements.
It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of
development experience and continuous stringent quality checks.
Potential sources of danger
The equipment is safe in normal operation. However, some potential sources of danger
cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these may arise during the following
operations:
• Opening of housings or equipment covers
• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from
the power supply
• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections
• Through possible contact with live pairs, laser light, hot surfaces, sharp edges, or
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge
Special safety instructions
Laser safety and handling components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) are
vitally important to the equipment. For special safety instructions concerning laser safety
and electrostatic discharge, refer to the section, “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-11).
General safety requirements
In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it is imperative
to observe the following rules.
• Transport, storage, and operation of the unit/system must be under the permissible
conditions only.
See accompanying documentation and information on the unit/system.
• Installation, configuration, and disassembly must be performed only by expert
personnel referring to the respective documentation.
Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel performing installation,
configuration, and disassembly require special training.
• Expert and authorized users are required to operate the unit/system.
Safety General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Operate the unit/system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety
and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems,
additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service
personnel must be carried out and documented.
• Do not operate the unit/system unless it is in perfect working order.
Immediately report any faults or errors that might affect safety.
• Operate the unit/system with the proper connections and under the environmental
conditions as described in the documentation.
• Only qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or expert personnel authorized by
Alcatel-Lucent are permitted to perform conversions or changes to the system or parts
of the system (including the software).
All changes performed by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability.
Do not use components or spare parts that are not recommended by the manufacturer
and those not listed in the procurement documents.
• Only specially qualified personnel are permitted to remove or disable safety facilities,
clear faults and errors, and maintain the equipment.
Strictly observe the respective parts of the documentation, and consult the
documentation during the selection of measuring and test equipment.
• Document and archive all work related to calibrations, special tests after repairs, and
regular safety checks.
• Use non-system software at your own risk. The use/installation of non-system
software can adversely affect the normal functioning of the unit/system.
Safety General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-5
Laser safety
Compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product line complies with the following laser safety
regulations and standards:
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify 1830
PSS as a Class 1M laser product
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS products as Class 1 laser devices
• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class IIIb
laser product
• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class I laser
product
General laser information
Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating
systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths
between approximately 800 nanometers (nm) and 1600 nm. The emitted light is above the
red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although
radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can
see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude below
any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.
Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light.
Monochromatic light is a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or
invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and
because the beam size is small, the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.
Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state
regulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.
A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well
collimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance.
However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence, typically 10 to
20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces
the irradiance by a factor of four) and rapidly decreases over distance.
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Lasers and eye damage
The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400 to 1400-nm range
may cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye, the
eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The
irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 (or 100,000 times
more than at the cornea) and, if sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.
The damage mechanism at wavelengths used in optical fiber telecommunications is
thermal in origin; for example, damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount
of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the
retina occurs only when one looks at the light sufficiently long that the product of the
retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies
above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns, but these optical energies do not affect the
retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly
higher than that for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.
Classification of lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the United States are regulated by the Food
and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)
under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser
product as belonging to one of four major classes: I, II, IIa, IIIa, IIIb, or IV.
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international standards body
that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar and
divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3B, 3R, and 4. Lasers are classified according to the
accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.
Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1, because,
under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are
terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming
a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front
of the laser circuit pack shelves. The circuit packs themselves, however, may be
FDA/CDRH Class I, IIIb, or IV or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B, 3R, or 4. State-of-the-art Raman
and EDFA optical amplifiers have now extended into the Class IV/4 designations.
Laser safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunications systems
In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totally
enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA/CDRH
and IEC classifications.
The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber
telecommunication system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave
emission. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the technician
to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing. Unlike more
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-7
familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern of a
semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the
irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the
less energy will enter the eye and the less potential risk for eye injury. If you inadvertently
view an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater
than 5 to 6 inches, normally, it will not cause eye injury provided that the power in the
fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts
at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if you use an optical instrument
such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe to stare at the energized fiber end.
Laser Radiation
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
Use controls, adjustments, and procedures specified in this document to avoid hazardous
laser radiation exposure.
Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems
Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are
completely enclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for enclosed
systems:
• Because of the potential for eye damage, do not stare into optical connectors or
broken fibers.
• Do not under any circumstances perform laser/fiber optic operations before
satisfactorily completing laser safety training.
• Since viewing lightwave emission directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical
instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,
observe/follow laser safety labels. Appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in
close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access panel of the
terminal equipment.
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems
During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is
considered unenclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for unenclosed
systems:
• Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and
restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical
connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser
circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port
shutters, automatic power reduction (APR), and automatic power shutdown (APSD)
are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions. However, do not
stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying
lenses when removing or replacing laser circuit packs. (Normal eye wear or indirect
viewing instruments, such as a Find-R-Scopes, are not considered magnifying lenses
or optical instruments.)
• Only authorized, trained personnel shall use the optical test equipment during
installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Some
examples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers
[OTDRs] and Hand-Held Loss Test Sets.)
• Do not, under any circumstance, scan a fiber with an optical test set without verifying
that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.
• Only authorized personnel are permitted in the immediate area of the optical fiber
telecommunication systems during installation and service.
For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber optic communication systems in the
workplace, consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Optical
Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diodes and LED Sources in the United
States or outside the United States, IEC-60825, Part 2.
Laser warning labels
The following figure shows the different types of laser warning labels:
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-9
Legend
1. Laser symbol
2. Laser classification labels (This label may show only the laser class or both the laser
class and the maximum output power.)
Safety Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Electrostatic discharge
Overview
ESD (for example, caused by touching with the hand) can destroy semiconductor
components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no longer assured.
Compliance
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device complies with ANSI T1.308-1996,
the Central Office Equipment - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Requirements, 1996.
ESD warning
NOTICE
ESD hazard
ESD can destroy electronic components.
Always keep circuit packs in antistatic covers. Use the original packaging if possible. Use
a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on the system to
prevent ESD damage to sensitive components.
All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to ESD. The ESD can also affect
the components indirectly.
ESD considerations
This section describes the precautions required to prevent ESD damage.
Circuit pack handling precautions
Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static
electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The static charges are produced
by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows
greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials are measured in areas with low
relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause damage can occur anywhere.
Observe the following precautions when handling circuit packs/units to prevent ESD
damage.
• Assume all circuit packs contain solid-state electronic components that can be
damaged by ESD.
• When handling circuit packs (for example storing, installing, and removing) or when
working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap
and stand on a grounded, static-dissipating floor mat.
• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid ESD.
Safety Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-11
• Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost
edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.
• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packing. Circuit packs
and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected
against static charge buildup.
• Observe all warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove
circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.
• If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properly
grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats.
• Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Shielding is not
required unless specified.
• Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and Styrofoam®
containers away from all circuit packs. When removing circuit packs from a shelf,
immediately place the circuit packs in static-safe packages.
• Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.
Important! Ensure that any connectors on the shelf interconnection panel that are not
cabled are fitted with a plastic dust cap to provide ESD protection.
Static control wrist straps
To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device shelf is
equipped with an ESD grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves using
wrist straps, while handling circuit packs or working on the shelf. Check the wrist straps
periodically with a wrist strap tester to ensure that they are working properly.
Important! The grounding jack is located on the front of the shelf, on the lower-right
corner. Another grounding jack is also located on the rear panel.
Barred-hand symbol
Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to ESD are identified by
warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol. The following figure shows the
barred-hand symbol.
Safety Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Save these safety instructions
READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS.
When installing this product, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Follow all instructions provided with this unit.
2. Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and performed by trained
personnel only.
3. This equipment is intended to be provided with appropriate 15 A (Max) branch circuit
protection on both the A and B -48/-60 V dc input feeds.
4. Opening or removing covers or sheet metal parts may present exposure to high
current or electrical energy levels or to other risks.
5. Use only Alcatel-Lucent manufactured circuit packs designed for use with this
equipment.
6. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-1 Installation Instructions.
7. This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part
of the building installation. (Such as a main power disconnect switch or external
circuit breaker).
8. Use only Alcatel-Lucent Power Cable Assembly provided with this equipment when
connecting to -48/-60 A/B V dc power sources.
9. Connect this product only to the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
10. This equipment is to be powered only by Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or
Telecommunication Network Voltage 2 (TNV2) type sources.
11. Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.
Refer to the Installation Instructions.
12. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunication lines.
13. Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.
14. Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
15. Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless the
telecommunication line has been disconnected at the interface.
16. Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect it from
overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
17. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings in this product as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or
electrical shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
18. DANGER: Invisible laser radiation when open and fiber optic cable disconnected.
Avoid Direct Exposure to Beam.
Safety Save these safety instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
1-13
19. CAUTION: This unit has up to two (2) -48/-60 V input power feeders. Disconnecting
less than the maximum will not de-energize the system.
To reduce the risk of injury, disconnect two (2) power feeders when removing power
to the system.
20. NOTICE: Unterminated optical connections may emit laser radiation. Do Not View
With Optical Instruments.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Certification
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device meets the following certifications:
• UL Certification UL 1950 / UL 60950
• Canadian Safety Assoc. CSA-22.2-No.25-M90
Safety Save these safety instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2 21830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 MD4H and its
supported features for Release 1.7.
Contents
Introduction 2-2
Hardware design and layout 2-4
Features 2-12
Multiservice muxponder 2-18
Configurations 2-22
Topologies 2-27
CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management 2-30
Protection 2-33
Loopbacks 2-38
Performance Monitoring 2-41
Status Retrieval 2-45
System access 2-46
Synchronization 2-47
Reliability program 2-49
Ordering 2-63
Technical specifications 2-77
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-1
Introduction
1830 PSS-1 Edge Device in Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio
Metropolitan networks are the telecommunications networks connecting residential and
business premises to larger, long-distance core networks. These complex networks serve
to back haul traffic or route traffic locally between different sites. Metro networks
separate into Metro Core networks which are typically rings or meshed networks
providing the service aggregation and interconnection points to the long-haul networks
and Metro Access networks which collect services closer to residential and business
customers.
The 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device platform is designed for installation at the edge of these
metropolitan networks. Multiple versions of this platform are available:
• The 1830 PSS-1 GBEH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device providing up
to 10 GbE services, or 32 sub-rate EVCs over an 11G optical channel. This product is
described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device User Guide.
• The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting two
specially adapted PSS1MD4 OTs, similar to 4DPA4 OTs that can be installed in the
PSS-32, with four multiservice client ports, and two 2.7Gbps line ports on each OT
for sub-ODU1 signals and 2.5G signals, or two 4.5Gbps line ports for 4G FC signals,
on each OT. This product is documented in this document.
• The 1830 PSS-1 MSAH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting
two specially adapted OTs, a PSS1MD4 and a PSS1P21. The PSS1MD4 is similar to
the 4DPA4 OT that can be installed in the PSS-32, with four multiservice client ports,
and two 2.7Gbps or 4.5Gbps line ports. The PSS1P21 provides 21 E1 client ports and
2 STM-1 line ports. This product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
MSAH Edge Device User Guide.
• The 1830 PSS-1 AHP — a 1 RU Device supporting a specially adapted high power,
high gain amplifier, similar to the AHPHG that can be installed in the PSS-32. Two of
these devices are installed together and managed as a single NE to create a low cost
ILA node for optical spans connecting 1830 PSS devices. This product is described in
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier User Guide.
PSS-1 MD4H overview
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H is a 1 RU Edge Device supporting two specially adapted
PSS1MD4 OTs, similar to 4DPA4 OTs that can be installed in the PSS-32. These modules
each accept up to four client signals via SFP optics, and perform non-blocking
multiplexing into one or both of their respective line ports. Each module has dual
pluggable OTU1 line ports that support B & W or CWDM line signals. They support a
variety of sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
The PSS1MD4 client interfaces have the ability to support Fast Ethernet, Gigabit
Ethernet, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, FC100, FC200, FC400, SD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, and HD-SDI services up to the capacity of the ODU1 line. The PSS-1 MD4H
supports standard dual fiber transmission and bidirectional transmission over the single
fiber.
Note: Bidirectional transmission requires that an SFC filter (SFC 2/4/8) be used as a
combiner/splitter between the two single-fiber transmit and receive ports of the
PSS1MD4 line interfaces, and the bidirectional single fiber transport medium.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-3
Hardware design and layout
Purpose
This section provides an overview of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device physical
architecture.
Compliance Standards
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device complies with the follow regulatory standards for
Environmental, Safety, EMC, ESD, and Hazardous Substances
North America Region:
• Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 “Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical
Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment”
• Telecordia GR-63-CORE, Issue 3 “NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection.
• CSA Certified (US and Canadian) UL 60950-1, Second Edition / CSA C22.2 No.
60950-1-07, Second Edition, “Information Technology Equipment – Safety – Part 1 :
Generic Requirements”
• 21 CFR 1040.10, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Performance Standards for
Light Emitting Products”
• 21 CFR 1040.11, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Specific Purpose Laser
Products”
• FCC Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47 – Telecommunications, Part 15 – “Radio
Frequency Devices”, Class A
• ICES-003, Issue 4 ”Industry Canada Spectrum Management and Telecommunications
Policy, “Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus”, Class A
European Market:
• Directive 2004/108/EC, “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)”
• Directive 2006/95/EC, “Low Voltage Electrical Equipment”
• Directive 93/465/EEC, “CE Marking Directive”
• IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition) / EN 60950-1:2006 “Information Technology
Equipment – Safety – Part 1 : Generic Requirements”
• EN 60825-1: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements, and Users Guide”
• EN 60825-2: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber
Communication Systems”
• EN 300 386 “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
requirements”
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
• EN 55022: "Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics -
Limits and methods of measurement". Class A
• ETSI ES 201 468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Additional Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific
applications
• EN 300 019 2-1 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-1: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Storage
• EN 300 019 2-2: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-2: Specification Of
Environmental Tests; Transportation
• EN 300 019 2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Environmental Conditions And
Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-3: Specification Of
Environmental Tests - Stationary Use At Weather Protected Locations
• ETS 300 753: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Acoustic Noise Emitted By
Telecommunications Equipment
Dimensions
The 1830 PSS-1 shelf (PSS1MD4H), depicted in Figure 2-3, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device- Descriptive View” (p. 2-8), weighs 3.0 kg and has the following dimensions
43.5 mm (H) x 443.9 mm (W) x 279.7 mm (D/without cover) or 290 mm (D/with cover).
Note: The complete Shelf Kit (MD4HKIT) weights 3.9 kg.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-5
Figure 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device showing Dimensions
443.90mm(17.476 in.)443.90mm(17.476 in.)
279.70mm(11.012 in.)
ChassisDepth
279.70mm(11.012 in.)
ChassisDepth
289.50mm(11.398 in.)To Front
Cover
289.50mm(11.398 in.)To Front
Cover
43.50mm(1.713 in.)43.50mm(1.713 in.)
OUT C1 IN OUT C2 IN OUT C3 IN OUT C4 INOUT VA1 IN OUT VA2 INOUT L1 IN OUT L2 IN OUT C1 IN OUT C2 IN OUT C3 IN OUT C4 INOUT VA1 IN OUT VA2 INOUT L1 IN OUT L2 IN
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with the Cover
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-7
Mechanical design
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is 1 RU high and can be mounted in standard
19-inch, 23-inch, or ETSI racks, or wall mounted using available mechanical adapters. It
supports redundant -48 VDC power input filters. It also supports optional, pluggable
CWDM filters, and a pluggable fan unit with management I/O connections.
The basic configuration is shown below.
Figure 2-3 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device- Descriptive View
Figure 2-4 PSS-1 MD4H physical layout
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Layout and Front View of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is designed for Metro Access applications, and
based on two PSS1MD4 modules that are similar to 4DPA4 1830 PSS-32 modules
remapped into a CPE format.
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the following pluggable modules:
• 8 optical client ports for SFPs
• 4 optical line ports for SFPs
• 2 pluggable drawers for CWDM filters
• 2 pluggable Power Filters (PF)
• 1 pluggable Fan Unit & User Panel Module
The power filters, fan unit, SFCs, and filters are pluggable, and can be removed and
replaced. The controller (EC) is integrated into the backplane, and SLC is integrated into
MD4H OT board. They cannot be physically removed. These components are identified
by software as being in numbered slots, as described in “Component slot locations”
(p. 2-10).
Power Filters (PF)
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H supports redundant Power Filters, with a capacity of 250 Watts
(5.2 Amps @ -48 Vdc). If a single power filter becomes inoperable, the full capacity of
the shelf can be completely supported by the other Power Filter until a replacement is
installed. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device automatically recognizes equipage of
these modules. Each module supports a fuse and a LED for status.
Fan Unit & User Panel Module
It is comprised of
• a Fan unit with 4 variable speed, independent fans. A single fan failure has no effect
on the transmission capability of the PSS-1. The fan module supports a multicolored
LED for status indication.
• a User Panel residing at the front of the Fan module. There are 4 user interface ports.
The Craft port is an RS232 connection for the local craft. The CIT port is a dedicated
RJ45 to be used by a local craft with a laptop running a web browser (WebUI). The
CIT port is enabled by default, and cannot be disabled. In addition, the CIT port will
support DHCP Server so that, upon connection with the laptop, the laptop will be
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-9
assigned an IP address to communicate with the SPB after the appropriate
authentication process (see “Authentication” (p. 5-20), and “System access”
(p. 2-46)). The LAN1 port can be configured as needed by the user, and can be used to
connect to the management network. It is disabled until user provisioned. The LAN2
port is not supported in this release.
• a rotary switch to set the shelf ID number. Currently, all 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Devices are set to the default value (0001). In a future release, multiple 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Devices (up to 8) can be networked to form a single mini-NE from a
management point of view.
Component slot locations
In addition to the physical locations shown in Figure 2-4, “PSS-1 MD4H physical layout”
(p. 2-8), each of the components occupy a logical slot position. The number of this slot
position is used in CLI commands and when alarms indicate problems with a PSS-1
component. The locations of the logical slot numbers is shown in Figure 2-5, “PSS-1
MD4H logical slot numbers” (p. 2-10)
Component Function Required Maximum Slots
PF Power supply 1 (slot 2) 2 2, 3
FAN Fan subsystem 1 1 6
PSS1MD4 4G Dual port Pluggable AnyRate
OT (4 clients)
2 2 7, 8
E-SFC1 1 channel static CWDM filter 0 2 4, 5
E-SFC2 2 channel static CWDM filter 0 2 4, 5
E-SFC4 4 channel static CWDM filter 0 2 4, 5
E-SFC8 8 channel static CWDM filter 0 1 4
Figure 2-5 PSS-1 MD4H logical slot numbers
GROUND
ESD
PF ASLOT 2
PF BSLOT 3
E-SFCSLOT 4
E-SFCSLOT 5
OTSLOT 7
OTSLOT 8
FANSLOT 6
ECSLOT 1
(BACKPLANE){1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Carrier class operating environment
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is designed to operate in extended temperature
range environments. This supports its installation in outdoor cabinets and similar
deployments.
A pluggable fan module provides cooling for the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device.
In order for the fan module to provide adequate shelf cooling, the following conditions
must be met:
• The ambient temperature of the facility should be between -25°C and +65°C.
• Humidity:
CO Environment
– 85% long term
– 95% short term
ETSI
– 95% long term
Hardened Environment
– 100% long term
• The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of
obstructions that may affect fan efficiency. Cooling air for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device is drawn in on the right side and exhausted on the left, therefore the
sides of the unit should be free of obstructions.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-11
Features
Introduction
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be deployed as a standalone system or in
conjunction with the 1830 PSS-32. Each OT in the PSS-1 MD4H supports linear and
single channel ring configurations for transport and add/drop of multiservice connections
for protected or unprotected services.
Note: On a given PSS1MD4 OT, it is intended that all services are protected, or all
services are unprotected
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide for complete information about the 1830
PSS-32.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides an optimized multiservice
platform that includes the following features.
• 1 Rack Unit, mounts in 19”( EIA), 23”(WECO), or ETSI Frames.
• Two integrated PSS1MD4 OTs, each containing:
– 4xAnyRate (100 Mbps - 4.5 Gbps ) client ports (SFPs)
– Two line ports (B & W, CWDM) (OTU1 or overclocked OTU1) with Full
Compliance to G.709 Bit rate, Fault Processing and Signal Monitoring
– Mapping for FC400 (4.25 Gbps) directly to overclocked ODU1/OTU1
• OTU-1 Line to line Regeneration
• Flexible services & configurations
Each OT supports:
– Dual bit-rate transparent transponder (1:1+1:1)
– Dual 2xAny combiner (2:1+2:1)
– Single 4xAny combiner into OTU-1 (4:1)
– Flexible muxing (1:1+3:1, 1:1+2:1)
• CWDM filter drawer for 1 channel, 2 channels, 4 channels and 8 channels
• Single fiber bidirectional transmission
• 1+1 Electrical-SNCP protection option (< 50 ms)
• In-band management through GCC
• Digital Performance Monitoring
– Client side: 8B/10B CV, SONET, Ethernet, PCS, SDH
– Line side: ODU/OTU1 Path Monitoring
• Redundant hot-pluggable DC power modules (1+1)
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
• Pluggable Fan Unit & User Panel
• Temperature hardened unit and CWDMs for installation in non-temperature
controlled environments.
Application
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is a next generation high density multiservice
muxponder with two OTs, each of which support up to four client SFPs and two OTU1
(2.7G) line ports. Each 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device also has two slots reserved for
CWDM filter packs. The line ports use SFP modules to support single channel (B & W)
or CWDM transmission (up to 8 channels). The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be
deployed in Metro Access nodes or customer premises for multiservice back hauling.
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is suitable for installation in the following facilities:
• Network telecommunication facilities
• Locations where National Electric Code (NEC) is applicable
• Outdoor cabinets and other locations where extended temperatures are a factor.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device as standalone system
As a standalone system, one or more 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Devices can be configured
to function as the Gateway NE (GNE) for management access of the network.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with 1830 PSS-32/16
When used in conjunction with 1830 PSS-32/16, management access to the 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device is realized by extending the GCC on the optical transponder (OT)
residing on the 1830 PSS-32/16.
Optical interfaces
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports both B & W SFPs for single-channel
applications and CWDM SFPs for multiple channel applications (up to 8 channels).
Wavelength frequencies
Table below lists the center wavelength frequencies for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device with 8-channel CWDM.
Channel AID & Port Label Wavelength (nm)
1471 1471
1491 1491
1511 1511
1531 1531
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-13
Channel AID & Port Label Wavelength (nm)
1551 1551
1571 1571
1591 1591
1611 1611
CWDM filter modules
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
as listed below. E-SFCx is an optional CWDM static filter that can be installed in the
PSS-1 MD4H when more than one wavelength is carried over the fiber pair.
• Eight variants of 1-channel E-SFC1
• Four variants of 2-channel E-SFC2
• Two variants of 4-channel E-SFC4
• One variant of 8-channel E-SFC8
SFPs
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the following SFPs:
Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported
Module
description
Standards
reference (reach
description)
Mnemonic Supported signal
type
B & W STM-1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 SL-1.1 OC3/STM1
B & W STM-1/OC-3 S-1.1/IR-1 S-1.1 OC3/STM1
B & W STM-1/OC-3 L-1.2/LR-2 L-1.2 OC3/STM1
B & W
STM-4/OC-12
L-4.1/LR-1/40km SL-4.1 OC12/STM4
B & W
STM-4/OC-12
S-4.1/IR-1 /15 km S-4.1 OC12/STM4
ALU SFP L-4.2
-40/+85
L4.2,SM,80 km SL-4.2 OC12/STM4
B & W
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU-1
L-16.1/LR-1 SL-16.1 OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported (continued)
Module
description
Standards
reference (reach
description)
Mnemonic Supported signal
type
B & W
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU-1
L-16.2/LR-2 SL-16.2 OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1
B & W
STM-16/OC-48/
OUT-1
I-16.1/SR-1 SI-16.1 OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1
B & W
STM-16/OC-48
multirate Q2.7 Gbps
S-16.1/IR-1 SS-16.1A OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1,
1GBE, FC100,
FC200, HDSI,
SD-SDI, DVB-ASI
CWDM 2G5 MR Multirate ≤ 2.7 Gbps
(40 km)
SS-16.2C OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1,
1GBE, SD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, HDSI
Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-LX10 100B-LX10 FE
Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-BX
(downstream - 40km)
FE-BX40D FE
Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-BX
(upstream - 40km)
FE-BX40U FE
Electrical FE
SFP FE/FDDI
100BASE-T EL
W/Ext Temp
SFEBTEE 100BASE-T FE
B & W GbE 1000BASE-SX 1000B-SX 1GBE
B & W GbE 1000BASE-ZX 1000B-ZX 1GBE
B & W GbE 1000BASE-LX 1000B-LX 1GBE
B & W GbE 1000BASE-BX
(downstream - 40km)
GE-BX40D 1GBE/STM-4
B & W GbE 1000BASE-BX
(upstream 40km)
GE-BX40U 1GBE/STM-4
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-15
Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported (continued)
Module
description
Standards
reference (reach
description)
Mnemonic Supported signal
type
B & W GbE 1000BASE-BX
(downstream - 20km)
GE-BX20D 1GBE/STM-4
B & W GbE 1000BASE-BX
(upstream - 20km)
GE-BX20U 1GBE/STM-4
Electrical GbE 1000BASE-T 1000B-T 1GBE
B & W 4G FC LC-L 4FCLC-L FC100, FC200.
FC400
B & W 4G FC SN-I 4FCSN-I FC100, FC200.
FC400
CWDM Multirate ≤ 2.7 Gbps
(80 km)
SL-16.2C OC3/STM1,
OC12/STM4,
OC48/STM16,
CBR2G5, OTU1,
1GBE, SD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, HDSI
Extended Temperature Range (ETR) capability
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device includes the following features to support operation
in an ETR environment, where temperatures can range from -25° C to +65° C:
• A hardened chassis
• Hardened cards
• A variable-speed fan unit
• Hardened SFP pluggables
Note: Hardware installed in an ETR environment must be ETR capable. Operation of
non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment can result in hardware
damage.
Identifying extended temperature range cards
Integrated OT cards in PSS-1 units are ETR qualified depending on whether or not the
equipment controller within the unit is ETR qualified.
Replaceable ETR-capable cards are labeled as “ETR” on the bottom cover. Non-hardened
PSS-1 cards and pluggables will be automatically alarmed by software if detected in a
chassis which is provisioned for ETR operation. Software will display an ETR indicator
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
in inventory data, regardless of whether the node is provisioned for ETR operation. In
addition, non-ETR components are physically “keyed” so that they cannot be installed in
a PSS-1 MD4H chassis.
The temperature range of cards can also be determined from the remote inventory data of
removable cards and the EC by performing a "show card inventory" command. If "ETR"
characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field, the card is ETR qualified.
Otherwise it is not ETR qualified. Software will display an ETR indicator in inventory
data, regardless of whether the node is provisioned for ETR operation.
Identifying extended temperature range SFPs
SFPs that support ETR operation are identified during ordering. After installation, retrieve
remote inventory data for the OT ports by performing a "show interface inventory"
command. If "ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field, the
SFP is ETR qualified. Otherwise it is not ETR qualified.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-17
Multiservice muxponder
Purpose
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can serve as a muxponder for a variety of
sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.
Line ports
The PSS1MD4 ODU1 line ports must be manually provisioned. Each OTU1 is divided
into 16 proprietary time slots. Signals from the client ports can be assigned to time slots
according to their bandwidth requirements by the operator.
Note: In R1.0, pluggable line port OTs only support 44 even channels. The SFPs
supported on 4DPA4 line ports in R1.0 are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic
from the pluggable OTs may only traverse 100 GHz systems, unless muxed with a
tunable OT (11STMM10).
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on each PSS1MD4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN, as described in “Line port utilization” (p. 2-18).
Line port utilization
The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on each PSS1MD4 can be provisioned as
ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN (see Figure 2-6, “Add/Drop operational mode”
(p. 2-18) and Figure 2-7, “CROSSREGEN operational mode” (p. 2-19)).
Figure 2-6 Add/Drop operational mode
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Multiservice muxponder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Client ports
The client ports must be manually configured. They remain in the unassigned state until
the user assigns a specific client signal type. Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16
logical time slots. Signals from the client ports can be assigned by the operator, to time
slots according to their bandwidth requirements. The types of client signals supported in
this release, their operating bit rate, and the number of time slots required for each signal
are shown in Table 2-2, “Client signal time slot requirements” (p. 2-19).
Client port mapping
Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports
can be assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements.
The types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the
number of time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 2-2, “Client signal time
slot requirements” (p. 2-19).
Table 2-2 Client signal time slot requirements
Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time
slots
OC3/STM1 155.52 Mbps 1
OC12/STM4 622.08 Mbps 4
Figure 2-7 CROSSREGEN operational mode
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Multiservice muxponder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-19
Table 2-2 Client signal time slot requirements (continued)
Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time
slots
OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbps Full ODU1/OTU-1
(An STM16 client port must
be associated with either Line
port 1 or Line port 2 when
provisioning time slots.)
1GbE 1.25 Gbps 8
FE (100M Fast Ethernet) 125 Mbps 1
FC100 (1.0625G) 1.0625 Gbps 7
FC200 (2.125G) 2.125 Gbps 14
FC400 (4.25G) 4.25 Gbps Mapped directly to
overclocked ODU1/OTU1
without timeslots
HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI
HDTV)
1.485 Gbps 10
Any of the four client ports on each OT can be mapped to either of the two lines,
bandwidth permitting. As a result, flexible client-to-line configurations such as the
following are possible.
• 1:1 + 1:1 — dual transponders
• 1:1 + 2:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
• 1:1 + 3:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line
• 2:1 + 2:1 — dual mux
• 4:1 — all clients muxed onto one line
Examples of some of these configurations are shown in the following figure. All
connections are bidirectional
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Multiservice muxponder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-8 PSS1MD4 Client signal mapping examples
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Multiservice muxponder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-21
Configurations
Dual fiber configurations
The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device support common standard dual fiber
connections with each fiber transmitting data in just one direction.
Line Terminals (Degree 1)
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be configured as a terminal node. The node can
be configured with a B & W SFPs on the OTs (for a single terminating wavelength), or
one of the following filters: SFC2, SFC4, SFC8.
CWDM bus node
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports an asymmetrical degree 2 configuration
for CWDM bus architecture, which has an SFC’s OMD port facing one line side and its
EXP port facing another line side. One of the following SFCs can be used to support this
configuration: (E)SFC-4, (E)SFC-2, or (E)SFC-1.
Figure 2-9 4 channel terminal node
GROUND
ESD
PF PF SFC4 BLANK
OT OT LAN1
LAN2
GROUND
ESD
PF PF BLANK
OT OT LAN1
LAN2
NE1
NE2BLANK
Figure 2-10 CWDM bus node
SFCOMD
EXP
CH
CH
CH
CH
OT shelf
OT shelf
OT
External node
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Single fiber bidirectional configurations
Generally, the bidirectional optical transmission requires two fibers. However, there are
also applications calling for bidirectional transmission over a single fiber. The PSS1MD4
OTs within the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can to support such an application.
Bidirectional transmission requires that an SFC filter (SFC 2/4/8) be used as a
combiner/splitter between the two single-fiber transmit and receive ports of the
PSS1MD4 line interfaces, and the bidirectional single fiber transport medium.
Bidirectional single fiber transmission uses different CWDM wavelengths in each
direction.
This is accomplished by connecting the transmit and receive sides of line port on the OT
to two different wavelengths supported by the filter. The transmit and receive fibers are
connected to the IN ports of the different wavelengths on the filter. The wavelengths can
pass between the IN ports (the MUX side) of the filter and the OMD OUT port in both the
receive and transmit directions. So, a single fiber, connected to the OMD OUT port of the
filter, carries signals in both directions on their assigned wavelengths.
Bidirectional 1-degree OADM
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the single-fiber bidirectional transmission
with a terminal node (1-degree OADM) configuration, where a single CWDM filter is
used.
The supported SFC types are:
• (E)SFC-2A, (E)SFC-2B, (E)SFC-2C, (E)SFC-2D
• E)SFC-4A, (E)SFC-4B
• (E)SFC8
The table below lists the requirements on the configuration of CWDM filters:
SFC Filter type Maximum Capacity
(bidirectional
transmission)
SFC Ports
connecting to OT
ports
SFC port
connecting to the
transmission fiber
ESFC-1 1 / per SFC filter Channel in/ EXP in OMD out
Channel out/EXP out OMD in
ESFC-2 1 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out
Channel out ports OMD in
ESFC-4 2 /per SFC filter Channel in or out
ports
OMD out
Channel out ports OMD in
ESFC-8 4 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out
Channel out ports OMD in
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-23
The arrangement of fiber connections for these bidirectional configurations are shown in
the following illustrations.
Figure 2-11 (E)SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections
RXTXOT
(E)SFC-2A
1471_in
1471_out
1491_
1491_
OMD_out
OMD_in
EXP_in
EXP_out
MDX
in
out
Figure 2-12 (E)SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections
RXTX
OT
(E)SFC-4A
1471_i
1471_out
1491_i
1491_ou
OMD_out
OMD_in
EXP_in
EXP_out
RXTXOT
1511_i
1531_i
1511_ou
1531_out
MDX
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Bidirectional 2-Degree OADM (Symmetrical)
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports a single-fiber bidirectional transmission
2-degree OADM configuration, where two identical CWDM filters are used. ESFC2 and
ESFC4 filters are supported in this configuration. Band pass-through and channel loop
connections are allowed in this node.
Figure 2-13 (E)SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections
RXTX
OT
(E)SFC-8
OMD_out
OMD_in
RXTX
MUX
MUX
1471_in
1491_in
1511_in
1531_in
1471_out
1491_out
1551_out
1511_out
1531_out
1571_out
1591_out
1611_outOT
RXTX
OT
(E)SFC-8
OMD_out
OMD_in
RXTX
MUX
MDX
1471_in
1491_in
1511_in
1531_in
1471_in
1491_in
1511_in
1531_in
1471_out
1491_out
1551_out
1511_out
1531_out
1571_out
1591_out
1611_out
1471_out
1491_out
1551_out
1511_out
1531_out
1571_out
1591_out
1611_outOT
1551_in
1571_in
1591_in
1611_in
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-25
Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports single-fiber CWDM bidirectional
transmission with CWDM-DWDM regeneration, where regeneration OTs are equipped.
SFC2, SFC4 and SFC8 filters. An example CWDM single-fiber configuration for a
DWDM/CWDM mediating OT is shown below.
Figure 2-14 PSS-1 bidirectional 2-degree OADM
RXTX
SFC-4A1_in
2_in
OMD_out
OMD_in
EXP_in
EXP_out
RXTX
OT
SFC-4A
OMD_out
OMD_in
EXP_out
EXP_in
3_in4_in
3_in
4_in
SFC#2SFC#1
ADD/DROP
Band passthrough
loop
RXTXRXTX
1_in
2_in
Figure 2-15 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration
RX
TX
SFC-41_in
2_in
OMD_out
OMD_in
EXP_in
EXP_out
OT
3_in
4_in
SFC#2
RX
TX
CWDMDWDM
ClientLine
PSS-32
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Topologies
Purpose
This section provides an overview of the network topologies that can be configured for
the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device linear networks
One typical 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device topology is a linear standalone network.
These linear topologies are supported with either a single OTU-1 channel (2.7 Gb
capacity), using on one OT in the MD4H. Or, eight OTU-1 channels can be supported
with CWDM (up to 21.6 Gb capacity), using both OTs in four PSS-1 MD4H shelves, and
a CWDM filter in one of the shelves, as shown below.
Bidirectional topologies
Linear network topology is supported for single fiber transmission with, or without,
intermediate 2-degree OADMs.
Figure 2-16 Single channel point-to-point (OTU-1 capacity)
PSS-1MD4H
PSS-1MD4H
Terminal Terminal
SFP
Single channel
SFP
Figure 2-17 CWDM point-to-point (up to 21.6Gb capacity with 8 OTU-1 channels)
PSS-1MD4H
PSS-1MD4H
Terminal Terminal
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
PSS-1MD4H
SFP
SFP SFP
CWDM
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-27
Mixed 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS 1 network configurations
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be directly connected to a Service Card in a
1830 PSS-32 node, providing a very cost-effective way to use Metro Core
interconnection to a distant PSS1MD4, either in an 1830 PSS-32 NE, or as a component
of an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H. Both linear and ring topologies of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device can be interconnected to a 1830 PSS-32 node, over a single channel or using
CWDM. 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Release 1.7 supports the direct interconnection
between 1830 PSS-1 MD4H and 1830 PSS-32 via a 11STMM10 or 4DPA4 cards in 1830
PSS-32. The 11STMM10 card serves as a mediating card, providing the B & W/CWDM
to DWDM conversion between Metro Access and Metro Core.
Figure 2-19, “Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core
network for multiservice back hauling.” (p. 2-29) shows the case of a single channel
Metro Access ring made up of three 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Devices and sub-tending a
Metro Core DWDM ring. Services are collected in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
over a single OTU-1 channel which is forwarded by the 11STMM10 cards in the 1830
PSS-32 node D to the 11STGE12 card in the 1830 PSS-32 node E, where the services are
terminated on the PSS1MD4. Figure 2-19, “Single channel Metro Access ring
sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core network for multiservice back hauling.” (p. 2-29) This
shows a case of diversely routed services, achieved through the redundant 11STMM10
cards in node D. The 11STMM10 cards in the 1830 PSS-32 node D and E support B & W
(1310 nm) XFPs on the client side and DWDM tunable optics on the line.
Figure 2-18 Bidirectional single fiber linear nodes
BidirectionalTerminal
BidirectionalTerminal
BidirectionalTerminal
BidirectionalTerminal
Degree-2OADM node
Bidirectional single fiber CWDM transmission
Bidirectional single fiber CWDM transmission
SFP SFP
SFP SFP SFP SFP
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-19 Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core
network for multiservice back hauling.
PSS-1 PSS-1
PSS-1
PSS-32
PSS-32
11S
TG
BE
12
...
11S
TG
BE
12
...
11S
TM
M10
XFP
11S
TM
M10
XFP
SFP SFP SFP SFP
SFP SFP
PSS-32
Node A
Single channel ring(2.7Gb capacitiy)
Node BOTU-1
(working)
Node C
DWDMNetwork
PSS-32
PSS-32 PSS-32
PSS-1
PSS-1
PSS-1
Node ENode D
Node F
Node E
Node D Node F
Node A
Node C
Node BMultiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed
diversely)
Multiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed
diversely)
Multiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed
diversely)
Physical topologyLogical topology
(solid lines)
OTU-1(protection)
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Topologies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-29
CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management
Overview
A single fiber bidirectional link on the optical port is provisioned by specifying the port
connection attributes and the SFC card connection mode.
The SFC card connection mode has the following values:
• two-fiber mode (1): normal connection mode for bidirectional transmission
• one-fiber Mux mode (2): Only OMD OUT, EXP IN, CH IN are used for fiber
connection
Note: The default value of tnCardConnMode is two-fiber mode.
The following information provides examples of the topology associated with different
types of single-fiber bidirectional nodes.
Bidirectional CWDM OADM node
For a single-fiber bidirectional CWDM OADM node, the optical topology connections
within the node shall be provisioned as shown in the following table.
Connection
type
Local port End port End port type Start port Start port
type
ADD/DROP OT L1 SFC#1 CH2 Internal SFC#1 CH1 Internal
SFC#1 CH1 OT L1 Internal - Not Connected
SFC#1 CH2 - Not Connected OT L1 Internal
Loop SFC#1 CH3 - Not Connected SFC#2 CH3 Internal
SFC#2 CH3 SFC#1 CH3 Internal - Not Connected
SFC#1 CH4 - Not Connected SFC#2 CH4 Internal
SFC#2 CH4 SFC#1 CH4 Internal - Not Connected
Band
Pass-Through
SFC#1 EXP SFC#2 EXP Internal SFC#2 EXP Internal
SFC#2 EXP SFC#1 EXP Internal SFC#1 EXP Internal
SFC Card
Connection
Mode=OneFiberM
UX
In the above provision example the OT port is provisioned with two unidirectional
connections, the SFC CH port is provisioned with one unidirectional connection, and the
SFC EXP port is provisioned with a bidirectional connection.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Bidirectional OADM
In a single-fiber bidirectional OADM node, the external optical topology connections can
be provisioned as shown in the following table.
Connection
type
Local port End port End port type Start port Start port
type
External
ADD/DROP
OT L1 string #1 external string #2 external
SFC#1 CH1 string #3 external - Not Connected
SFC#1 CH2 - Not Connected string #4 external
OMD line SFC#1 OMD string external string external
SFC#2 EXP string external string external
SFC Card
Connection
Mode=OneFiberM
UX
In the above example the OT port is provisioned with two unidirectional connections, the
SFC CH port is provisioned with a unidirectional connection, and the SFC OMD port is
provisioned with a bidirectional external connection.
Bidirectional node for CWDM-DWDM regeneration
In a single-fiber bidirectional CWDM OADM node for CWDM-DWDM regeneration,
the optical topology connections within the node can be provisioned as shown in the
following table.
Connection
type
Local port End port End port type Start port Start port
type
Client
ADD/DROP
OT C1 SFC#1 CH1 Internal SFC#1 CH2 Internal
SFC#1 CH1 OT C1 external - Not Connected
SFC#2 CH2 - Not Connected OT C1 Internal
SFC Card
Connection
Mode=OneFiberM
UX
In the above example the OT client port is provisioned with two unidirectional
connections and the SFC CH port is provisioned with a unidirectional connection.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-31
Single-fiber bidirectional service model
A complete single-fiber bidirectional service consists of two unidirectional optical
channel (OCH) cross-connections (XCs) in an OADM node. The OCH XCs within the
node are modeled as shown in the following table.
XC type A-END Z-END Direction
ADD OT Line SFC OMD Unidirectional
DROP SFC OMD OT Line Unidirectional
External ADD SFC CH SFC OMD Unidirectional
External DROP SFC OMD SFC CH Unidirectional
Loop (A-->Z) SFC#1 OMD SFC#2 OMD Unidirectional
Loop (Z-->A) SFC#2 OMD SFC#1 OMD Unidirectional
Band Pass- Through
(A-->Z)
SFC#1 OMD SFC#2 OMD Unidirectional
Band Pass- Through
(Z-->A)
SFC#2 OMD SFC#1 OMD Unidirectional
Note: Within an NE, the topology link between the EXP ports of two SFC ports, and
between the CH ports of two SFC ports, can be provisioned only when the two SFCs
are in the same connection mode.
Note: An SFC card in single-fiber connection mode will only allow a unidirectional
cross-connect. Attempts to provision a bidirectional cross-connect on an SFC that is
set to single-fiber-mode will be rejected.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Protection
Overview
The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device support Electrical sub-block network
connection protection (E-SNCP). This is a line side (network side) protection mechanism
which protects against loss of the line signal due to SFP failure, fiber interruption, or a
malfunction of an intermediate NE node, as shown in the following example.
Figure 2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example (1 of 2)
4xMultiservice (2.7Gb total)
1 2 3 4
(Unprotected)
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-33
All clients on a PSS-1 MD4H OT must either be protected or unprotected. A mix of
protected and unprotected clients on the same unit is not currently supported. These two
options are shown in Figure 2-20, “Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example”
(p. 2-34). If there is any problem (fiber cut or otherwise) associated with the left SFP, then
the traffic from client 1 and client 3 will be impacted in the unprotected example. In the
protected example, no client will be impacted by this problem.
If... then...
protected the client signal will be sent to both SFPs and carried out the diverse
fibers.
unprotected the client signal will be routed to only one SFP.
Note: The near-end working and protection line ports must be connected to the
far-end working and protection line ports. This is the responsibility of the individual
configuring the network. There is no software verification.
E-SNCP
E-SNCP protection is implemented by permanent head-end bridging and dynamic tail-end
selection. This is illustrated in Figure 2-21, “E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT” (p. 2-35). The
E-SNCP function is contained within each PSS1MD4 OT. Each client port (plus the two
line ports) form an independent protection group. The bridging is performed at the ODU1
level. As a result, all client ports assigned to the working line are bridged simultaneously
to the protection line.
Figure 2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example (2 of 2)
4xMultiservice (2.7Gb total)
1 2 3 4
(Protected)
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
In the incoming direction, the OT receives two OTU1 line signals (working and
protection). After FEC error correction and OTU1/ODU1 overhead termination
respectively, client traffic is extracted independently from the two line signals according
to the OPTS mapping structure determined for the outgoing direction. Then, depending
on the external switch commands for individual protection groups, or signal quality, the
traffic for each client port is selected independently from the working or protection line
port.
Note: Currently the PSS1MD4 OTs in the PSS-1 MD4H do not support OPS or
Y-cable protection.
Protection groups
Up to four protection groups can be created on each OT, one for each client port on that
OT. Each protection group on the OT consists of at least one client port, the working line
port, and protection line port. Switching, both automatic and by user command, is on a
per-group basis. Each protection group operates independently of the others.
Figure 2-21 E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT
1830
Sub-network
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
client clientline line
Working path
Protection path
client line
ODU1
4DPA44DPA4
GbE,
FC etc
GbE,FC etc
GbE,
FC etc
OTU1OTU1
OTU1
Note: on-board line side WT
encoder/eVOA not plotted for
simplicity.
4DPA4
PSS-1 MD4H PSS-1 MD4H or PSS-32
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-35
On each PSS1MD4 OT, all services must be protected, or unprotected. A combination of
protected and unprotected services on the same OT is not supported.
If there are client port time slot assignments to only one line port, then all protection
groups must specify this line port as the working line. Otherwise, creation of the
protection group will be denied.
Because bridging is at the ODU1 level, at least one line port must be in the IDLE state
with no client port time slot assignments, before starting the creation of protection group.
Otherwise, creation of protection group will be denied.
Client port assignment
Time slot assignments are only provisioned and retrieved against individual client ports,
and a client port can have time slot assignments to only one line.
Line port assignment
If both line ports are in the IDLE state with no client port time slot assignments, the user
is free to specify either line port as the working port and the other line port as the
protection port for the first protection group. All subsequent protection groups must
follow the working/protection designation by the first group.
Protection group assignment
On the PSS1MD4 OT, you can configure a protection group if the client port and both
line ports are not involved in time slot assignments. That means time slot assignment
between the client port and line port (OPTS mapping) is independent creation of the
protection group. Time slots can be assigned before protection groups are created, or
protection groups can be created before time slots are assigned, either order is supported.
For a client port involved in a protection group but with no time slot assigned, the
protection state machine still runs normally for the protection group to which the client
port belongs.
If a working line has been specified (by creation of a protection group on any client port),
then all subsequent time slot assignments for all client ports are allowed to be made only
to the working line port.
For a client port which has time slot assignment and is currently in a protection group, the
related client signal type and allocated time slots are reported in the near end time slot
map (NETSMAP) on both the working and protection lines.
For a client port which has time slot assignment but is not currently in a protection group,
the related client signal type and allocated time slots are reported in the near end time slot
map (NETSMAP) on the working line only (the line to which the client time slots are
actually assigned).
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Switching
The total outage from a protected Signal Fail (SF) condition is less than, or equal to, 60
ms. This 60 ms is the sum of:
• 10 ms switch initiation time — The time it takes from occurrence of the failure to
detection and initiation of the switch.
• 50 ms switch completion time — The time it takes to perform the switch and to
recover transmission.
Note: Total outage may be greater than 50ms when there is an OTU1/ODU1 TTI
Mismatch defect, or ODU1 payload Type mismatch, as those defects usually require
more time to initiate a protection switch.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-37
Loopbacks
Purpose
This section contains the detailed requirements for LOOPBACKS for the 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device.
Loopbacks are typically used in a process of installation, system maintenance and
troubleshooting. The basic idea is to allow the user to test the circuit or isolate the failure
by connecting the test equipment to the system interface and creating the loopbacks at
different points in the transmission path. In the process of troubleshooting isolating
segments of the transmission path and associating the addition/removal of a monitored
segment with presence of a failure.
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will support the following types of loopbacks
consistent with GR-253-CORE.
• Facility loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.3.3)
The facility loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the
facility. (See Figure 2-22, “Loopback access points” (p. 2-40).)
• Terminal loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.2.1)
The terminal loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the
terminal hardware (back into the NE). (See Figure 2-22, “Loopback access points”
(p. 2-40).)
Performing loopbacks
Performing loopbacks is service affecting. You must take the facility out of service before
performing a loopback test.
The loopback operation is persistent in the NE. It will survive system restart and
in-service upgrade. During system restart the looped signal may be temporarily
interrupted. After the completion of a restart, the loopback which existed prior to the
restart will be restored.
A port under loopback operation cannot be provisioned to the In-Service state.
Facilities cannot be deleted while a loopback is still active. And, only one loopback
(facility or terminal) is allowed to be active on a facility at a time.
The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can support the following loopbacks.
Table 2-3 Supported loopbacks
Client interfaces (C{1-4}) Line interfaces (L1, L2)
OC-N FACILITY loopback (N=3, 12, 48) OTU1 FACILITY loopback
STM-N FACILITY loopback (N=1, 4, 16) OTU1 TERMINAL loopback
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-3 Supported loopbacks (continued)
Client interfaces (C{1-4}) Line interfaces (L1, L2)
1GBE FACILITY loopback
FE FACILITY loopback
FC100/FICON FACILITY loopback
FC200/FICON_EXPRESS/ISC3 FACILITY
loopback
FC400/FICON FACILITY loopback
HDSDI FACILITY loopback
OC-N TERMINAL loopback (N=3, 12, 48)
STM-N TERMINAL loopback (N=1, 4, 16)
1GBE TERMINAL loopback
FE TERMINAL loopback
FC100/FICON TERMINAL loopback
FC200/FICON_EXPRESS/ISC3 TERMINAL
loopback
FC400/FICON TERMINAL loopback
HDSDI TERMINAL loopback
Note: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the unit.
Loopback access points
The following illustration illustrates the loopbacks supported on the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device OTs configured for bidirectional service.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-39
Figure 2-22 Loopback access points
OTmodule
OE
O
OE
O
ClientPort Port
OTmodule
OE
O
OE
O
ClientPort Port
OTmodule
OE
O
OE
O
ClientPort Port
OTmodule
OE
O
OE
O
ClientPort
C/DWDMPort
LosProp=LPBK LosProp=LPBK
Client FacilityLoopback
DWDM PortTerminal Loopback
Client TerminalLoopback
DWDM Port FacilityLoopback
aLaserOFFAAIS
(or aLaserOFFif LOSPROP=LASEROFF)
C/DWDMC/DWDM
C/DWDM
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Performance Monitoring
Purpose
Performance monitoring (PM) refers to the in-service, non-intrusive monitoring of
transmission quality and equipment health. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device tracks
the signal quality and equipment health through continuous collection and analysis of
performance data. The user can retrieve current and past values of the system to get an
overview of the health of the system. The performance monitoring capability exists for
optical lines, channels, and equipment monitoring. Users have the ability to provision
threshold parameters to levels that might be indicative of impending performance
degradation. Responding to a performance degradation before there is a failure and
system alarms are raised is termed proactive maintenance. Responding to system alarms
is termed reactive maintenance. Crossing of a performance parameter threshold indicates
a potential network quality or performance degradation while the services being
transported have not been impacted. If a condition continues to deteriorate, then alarms
are raised and immediate attention may be required to resolve or repair the problem.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Performance Monitoring
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports performance monitoring both on the client
ports and on the OTU1 line side ports.
Optical Performance Monitoring
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports optical performance monitoring related to
received and transmitted optical power for both the optical client ports and the OTU1 line
side ports.
OTN Line Performance Monitoring supports a wide variety of client signals (including
sub-ODU1 signals, 2.5G signals, and 4.5G FC400 signal)
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device deliver G.709-framed sub-ODU1, 2.5G, and 4.25G
FC400 signals, and the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H monitors the following section and path
performance parameters accordingly:
Table 2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring
PM Parameter Section Path
Errored Seconds (ES) yes yes
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) yes yes
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) yes yes
Background Block Errors (BBE) yes yes
FEC: corrected bits yes yes
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Performance Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-41
Table 2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring (continued)
PM Parameter Section Path
FEC: uncorrected bytes yes yes
The performance monitoring complies to ITU-T G.874 and G.798.
Ethernet client Performance Monitoring
On client ports configured for GbE, the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the
non-intrusive monitoring of Ethernet per IETF RFC-2819, Tables 2 and 3. The following
Near-End Physical Coding Sublayer parameters are monitored for GbE connections.
Table 2-5 PCS PM parameter definitions
Parameter Mnemonic Definition
Code Violations - PCS CV-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B coding
violations
Errored Seconds - PCS ES-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B coding
violations ≥ 1 or dLSS = True or dLOS =
True
Severely Errored Seconds -
PCS
SES-PCS Count of seconds with 64B/66B or
8B/10B errors ≥ x2
or dLSS = True or
dLOS = True
Severely Errored Frame
Seconds - PCS
SEFS-PCS Count of seconds in which dLSS = True
or dLOS = True
How performance monitoring works
Performance monitoring (PM) statistics provide counts or measurements of significant
information that can be used to gauge the performance of the network element and the
services running on it.
The statistics gathered are used primarily for the following:
• to provide instant notification, via alarms, that acceptable thresholds for data such as
CPU utilization or dropped packets have been crossed.
• to provide a historical view of the performance of the network element over a given
period of time.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Performance Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
15 minutes and 24 hours counters
For each parameter, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides 15 minutes and 24 hours
counters:
• 15 minutes counters: 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides one current and 32
recent registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped and contains
a suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the interval is
suspected of being unequal to 15 minutes). The 15 minute intervals are aligned with
the 24 hour intervals.
• 24 hours counters: The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides one current and
seven recent 24H registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped
and contains a suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the
interval is suspected of being unequal to 24 hours). The 24 hour intervals are
synchronized to the time-of-day. The suspect indication is supported for all
measurement periods. The suspect indication is supported for all measurement
periods.
This complies to ITU-T G.784 and Telcordia GR-253 issue 3 (2000).
Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs)
Performance monitoring statistics are gathered for all interface ports and the statistics are
grouped by functional category. Each category has several monitored parameters for
which you can configure threshold crossing alerts (TCAs). A threshold is the mechanism
for generating a defined notification resulting from changes in PM parameter values. The
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device allows provisioning of performance parameter
thresholds, which can be set by the user to show degraded performance. You can
configure how much data is gathered, how it is stored, and how and when you are notified
if certain thresholds levels are crossed. Beginning with PSS-1 MD4H 1.7, a TCA is a
standing condition that can be obtained by interrogating the NE. (A standing condition is
a persistent state that must be cleared.)
Threshold values are considered as crossed when the value in the Current Register is
equal to or exceeds the value in the corresponding Threshold Register. No threshold for
clearing is supported. TCAs are reported via messages upon recognition of the threshold
crossings. No clearance is reported at the end of any monitoring period. TCA messages
for digital parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter register,
current threshold value, current register value, time and date of the occurrence.
TCA messages for analog parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter
register, current threshold value, current register value, base-lined value, time and date of
the occurrence. TCA message output contains absolute measure value for the current
register value and not the deviation from associated base-lined value.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Performance Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-43
For each threshold on a Current register, only one TCA is sent during an accumulation
period, unless the Current register is reset. If the Current register is reset and subsequently
its value again reaches or exceeds the threshold value, another TCA is sent. When a
threshold is crossed, the NE does not reset the register, but continues counting to the end
of the accumulation period.
The data for each PM group is queried and tested for threshold crossings at the following
intervals:
• 15-min bin: every 15 minutes
• 24-hr. bin: every 24 hours
A TCA event is reported within a minute of the TCA event occurring.
Note: The PM groups are also queried and tested for threshold crossings when the
contents of the raw bin are viewed. This query is in addition to the regularly
scheduled queries.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Performance Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Status Retrieval
Objective
Configuration parameters and status information can be retrieved for a range of
equipment and conditions on 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. Status information is
retrieved using the CLI. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
The following status retrieval options are available from the CLI:
• System Timing status
• Loopbacks
• All Faults
Retrieving user status
The NE maintains all active and inactive users.
• Admin or Service users can retrieve session information on all active (session
established) authenticated (logged on) users at any given time.
• Users with appropriate security level privileges can retrieve information related to the
login parameters (i.e., time remaining before a user login becomes disabled due to
password aging) of provisioned users in the system, and information indicating
whether or not the provisioned user is disabled or enabled to login.
• Users with sufficient security level privileges can retrieve session information on all
active (session established) unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions at any given
time.
Retrieving and editing user privileges
The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided
to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile
database entry for another user.
• Only users with administrator privileges can modify a user’s security level. It is not
possible to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.
• Modifications to user specific provisioned values are not allowed for a user that is
currently logged on.
• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile
entries. Otherwise a user can only retrieve his own user profile entry.
• Only those parameters values that are actually applied for the specified UID are
reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but
still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Status Retrieval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-45
System access
Overview
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports local access for provisioning and status
retrieval.
IP address
The IP address of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is configured through the CLI.
During a software installation/upgrade, a computer with an IP address is used as the FTP
host for the upgrade. This computer will contain the source file (zipped in tar.gz) to be
loaded and will also have an FTP server running. Refer to, “Software installation”Proc-
edure 4-3: “Software installation” (p. 4-5).
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device System access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Synchronization
Manual Time of Day synchronization
The following apply for manual (non-NTP) Time of Day synchronization.
• The NE date and time are capable of being modified via user interface command
• If NTP synchronization is enabled, attempts to modify date and time are denied.
• Changing the date or time, without input errors, will not cause any alarms, conditions,
or autonomous messages from the NE system due to date or time changes.
• The system ensures the date/time is set and reported within the valid range supported
by the user commands. The valid date range is from 1-Jan-2005 to 31-Dec-2059.
• The NE preserves the correct time and date through a restart/reboot of the processors
where there is no loss of power, and also when a module or device (hard disk) has
been replaced.
• The NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the selected
NTP server, when enabled, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages,
event reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps use this time of day.
Note: Time/date changes may cause partial or incomplete PM data, depending on the
magnitude of the time change. Time/date changes will not affect the application of
security measures such as password aging.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronization
The NE is capable of synchronizing its time of day via Network Time Protocol (NTP). It
is possible to provision up to ten (10) NTP servers and it is also possible to delete an NTP
server. The user can retrieve the attributes and service state of all designated NTP servers
via user command.
The following applies:
• It is possible to enable or disable NTP synchronization. When NTP protocol is
enabled, the NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the
selected NTP server, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages, event
reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps will use this time of day (NTP UTC
time + provisioned offset).
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-47
When NTP protocol is disabled after having been synchronized to an NTP server, the
NE internal clock adopts the last value of the NTP server time as its set time and
continues to calculate time stamps using the provisioned offset.
• The NE supports the following time-of-day synchronization modes:
– non-synchronized, free-running mode: NTP is not enabled, and the NE is not
synchronized to an NTP server and is instead using its own internal clock as a
source.
– synchronized mode: the NE is using the NTP protocol to synchronize to an NTP
server. The NE is polling the NTP server and periodically making corrections to
its internal clock so as to maintain the same clock time as the NTP server.
• The current time-of-day synchronization mode is retrievable via user command
• NTP server addresses and NTP enable/disable status is able to survive a database
backup and restore.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Reliability program
Overview
The reliability program is implemented as an integral part of the Alcatel-Lucent Product
Life Cycle (PLC) process. The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes
activities such as setting and ensuring compliance with customer-focused
system-reliability requirements, ensuring component qualification is consistent with use
environment and system design, predicting failure rates of Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs), assessing reliability architecture, modeling system reliability, assuring
satisfactory system-downtime performance, reducing hardware failure rates through
Environmental Stress Testing (EST), and tracking field returns.
The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes the following activities:
• Sets and ensures compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirement
• Ensues component qualification is consistent with use environment and system design
• Predicts failure rates of FRUs
• Assesses reliability architecture
• Models system reliability
• Ensures satisfactory system-downtime performance
• Reduces hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing (EST)
• Tracks field returns
Design and development
During the design and development stage, reliability predictions, qualification and
selection of components, definition of quality assurance audit standards, and prototyping
of critical areas of the system ensure built-in reliability.
Manufacturing and field deployment
During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stress
testing, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, and
feedback and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvement
efforts.
Failure Rates
This section provides reliability figures of 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device Orderable Items with non-zero failure rates per Telcordia SR-332 [1], Method
I-D.
Failure rates are expressed in FITs, where one FIT is one failure in 109
operating hours.
The mean time to failure (MTTF) in years is given by:
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-49
In this equation, λ is the steady-state failure rate per SR-332, Issue 2; Method I-D. The
mean time between failures (MTBF) is defined by:
In this equation, MTTR is the mean time to repair. Since MTTF >> MTTR, MTBF is very
close to MTTF. Hence the two terms MTBF and MTTF are often used interchangeably.
Table 2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a
controlled environment
Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
MD4HKIT ED MD4H Shelf
Kit (incl.
PSS1MD4H,
PWRx2, FAN11
)
(hardened)
8DG59884AA 8255 14
PSS1MD4H MSC Dual Edge
Device (RSA
PSSMD4H
(backplane +
PSS1MD4x2)
8DG59885AA 5825 20
EDFANUP Hardened Edge
Device Fan Unit1
)
User Panel
integrated
8DG59379HA 1726 66
EDPFDC Edge Device
Power Filter (DC)
- Hardened
8DG59382HA 352 324
E_SFC1A Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59592HA 223 512
MTTF =8760
y10
9
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a
controlled environment (continued)
Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
E_SFC1B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59592HB 223 512
E_SFC1C Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59592HC 223 512
E_SFC1D Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59592HD 223 512
E_SFC1E Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (E
Variant)
8DG59592HE 223 512
E_SFC1F Edge Device -
Static Filter
HardenedCWDM
1 Channel (F
Variant)
8DG59592HF 223 512
E_SFC1G Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (G
Variant)
8DG59592HG 223 512
E_SFC1H Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (H
Variant)
8DG59592HH 223 512
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-51
Table 2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a
controlled environment (continued)
Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
E_SFC2A Edge Device Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel
(A Variant)
8DG59601HA 235 486
E_SFC2B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59601HB 235 486
E_SFC2C Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59601HC 235 486
E_SFC2D Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59601HD 235 486
E_SFC4A Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
4 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59593HA 260 439
E_SFC4B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
4 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59593HB 260 439
E_SFC8 CWDM Channel
Static Filter
Hardened
8DG59594HA 296 386
SFP Small Form Factor
Pluggable
210 544
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Notes:
1. The fan unit is a limited-life component, per Telcordia SR-332. The published failure rate
(MTBF) represents an average rate during the useful life of the fan unit, which is 6.5 years.
Preventive replacement of a fan unit which has reached its end-of-life is highly
recommended. If a fan unit is allowed to run past its end-of-file, its failure rate will be
greater than the published value.
According to Telcordia SR-332, the failure rate (MTBF) of a circuit pack in a remote
terminal (uncontrolled environment) is twice the failure rate of the same pack in a central
office (controlled environment).
Table 2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an
uncontrolled environment
Acronym Orderable Item APN (12 digit) Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
MD4HKIT ED MD4H Shelf
Kit (incl.
PSS1MD4H,
PWRx2, FAN11
)
(hardened)
8DG59884AA 16510 7
PSS1MD4H MSC Dual Edge
Device (RSA
PSSMD4H
(backplane +
PSS1MD4x2)
8DG59885AA 11650 10
EDFANUP Hardened Edge
Device Fan Unit1
)
User Panel
integrated
8DG59379HA 3452 33
EDPFDC Edge Device
Power Filter (DC)
- Hardened
8DG59382HA 704 162
E_SFC1A Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59592HA 446 256
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-53
Table 2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an
uncontrolled environment (continued)
Acronym Orderable Item APN (12 digit) Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
E_SFC1B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59592HB 446 256
E_SFC1C Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59592HC 446 256
E_SFC1D Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59592HD 446 256
E_SFC1E Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (E
Variant)
8DG59592HE 446 256
E_SFC1F Edge Device -
Static Filter
HardenedCWDM
1 Channel (F
Variant)
8DG59592HF 446 256
E_SFC1G Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (G
Variant)
8DG59592HG 446 256
E_SFC1H Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
1 Channel (H
Variant)
8DG59592HH 446 256
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an
uncontrolled environment (continued)
Acronym Orderable Item APN (12 digit) Failure Rate
(FITs)
MTBF
(yrs)
E_SFC2A Edge Device Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel
(A Variant)
8DG59601HA 470 243
E_SFC2B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59601HB 470 243
E_SFC2C Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59601HC 470 243
E_SFC2D Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
2 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59601HD 470 243
E_SFC4A Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
4 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59593HA 520 220
E_SFC4B Edge Device -
Static Filter
Hardened CWDM
4 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59593HB 520 220
E_SFC8 CWDM Channel
Static Filter
Hardened
8DG59594HA 592 193
SFP Small Form Factor
Pluggable
420 272
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-55
Notes:
1. The fan unit is a limited-life component, per Telcordia SR-332. The published failure rate
(MTBF) represents an average rate during the useful life of the fan unit, which is 6.5 years.
Preventive replacement of a fan unit which has reached its end-of-life is highly
recommended. If a fan unit is allowed to run past its end-of-file, its failure rate will be
greater than the published value.
Sparing Tables for Field Replaceable Units
The circuit pack sparing levels in the following tables were determined using the
methodology in Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385 [2]. In the context of
sparing calculations, lead time is the time to replenish the sparing pool with a new or
repaired pack. The sparing levels are based on circuit pack steady-state FIT rates given in
Table 2-6, “Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a controlled
environment” (p. 2-50) and a service continuity objective of 99.999%.
Attention: Lead time, as used herein, does not pertain to the delivery intervals from
the submission of a purchase order, as that term may be used under any applicable
contract. Furthermore, lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair
(typically, 2 hours in a central office), which is the time elapsed from when a circuit
pack or unit is known to fail in service to when a spare circuit pack or unit is placed in
service to replace the failed item. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain the
recommended sparing levels at all times. The need to maintain recommended sparing
levels implies that a replacement spare must be ordered immediately upon the
detection of a pack failing in service. In addition, lead times and FIT rates specified
here are assumptions for purposes of maintaining adequate sparing levels only, and
they do not change the terms of any applicable contracts, including ordering terms,
lead times, delivery provisions, or any applicable warranties that may be in effect.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-23 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time for packs in a controlled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-57
Figure 2-24 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-25 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 60 Day Lead Time for packs in a controlled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-59
Figure 2-26 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 60 Day Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 2-27 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 90 Day Lead Time for circuit packs in a controlled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-61
Figure 2-28 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit
Sparing Levels - 90 Day Lead Time for circuit packs in an uncontrolled
environment
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-62 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Ordering
Purpose
This section provides ordering details for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ordering
information.
Table Contents
Table 2-8, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE
CD-ROMs and License Point Fees”
(p. 2-63)
lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 MD4H network element
(NE) software CD-ROMs.
Table 2-9, “PSS-1 MD4H SFPs” (p. 2-64) lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32 and the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
SFP pluggable optics
Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H common
equipment” (p. 2-72)
lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device common equipment.
Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation
kits” (p. 2-73)
lists the ordering information for 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device installation kits, and their
contents.
Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit:
customer-replaceable items” (p. 2-74)
lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Devicekit: customer-replaceable
items.
Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H
miscellaneous equipment” (p. 2-74)
lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device miscellaneous equipment.
Ordering details
Table 2-8, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees”
(p. 2-63) lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 network element
(NE) software CD-ROMs.
Table 2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
MD4H
SWP-
1830 PSS
R3.0.0
1830 PSS
R3.0.0
CDROM
8DG60712AAAA — X —
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-63
Table 2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees
(continued)
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830
PSS-32
1830
PSS-1
MD4H
SWP
1830PSS-
1MD4H
R1.7.0
1830PSS-
1MD4H
R1.7.0
CDROM
3KC27893AAAA — — X
SWL-
Wave-
length
Tracker
1830PSS32
License
Fee
1830 PSS-32
R2.0 Software
License Fee
(incl.
Wavelength
Tracker)
8DG60207AAAA — X —
SWL-
Photonics
VERS
“A”
WDM LP
WDM Blade
License Point
Fee
3AL75117AAAA — X —
SWL-
Photonics
VERS
“A” TDM
LP
TDM Blade
License Point
Fee
3AL75118AAAA — X —
SWL-
Photonics
VERS
“A” ETH
LP
Ethernet
Blade License
Point Fee
8DG59727AAAA — X —
Table 2-9, “PSS-1 MD4H SFPs” (p. 2-64) lists the ordering information for the 1830
PSS-32 and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFP pluggable optics.
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
Line (OTU1)
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-64 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SL-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 1AB376370003 ALU SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 NGI7ANRMAA
1AB376370007
(ETR)
ALU SFP L-16.1
-40/+85
-
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200001 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANFMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200002 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUPMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200003 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANHMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200004 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANJMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200005 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANKMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200006 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANLMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200007 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANMMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200008 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANNMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200009 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUHMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200010 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUNMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200011 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUPMAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-65
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200012 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AURMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200013 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUSMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200014 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUTMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200015 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUUMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200016 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUVMAA
SS-16.1A 2G5 MR
SFP(S-16.1/
IR-1)
1AB376370005 B & W STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(IR-1)
WMU1AF2CAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM7MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160002 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM8MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160003 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM9MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160004 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANAMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160005 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANBMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160006 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANCMAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-66 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160007 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANDMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160008 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANEMAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070001 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB1XTAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070002 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB1YTAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070003 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB1ZTAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070004 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB10TAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070005 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB11TAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070006 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB12TAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070007 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB13TAA
4FC-OC NA 1AB155070008 CWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM
WOTRB14TAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360003 DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBFKTAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360004
thru-
1AB383360008
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBFVTAA
thru-
WOTRBFZTAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360009
thru-
1AB383360018
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBF0TAA
thru-
WOTRBF9TAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360019
thru-
1AB383360026
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBGATAA
thru-
WOTRB-
GHTAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-67
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360027
thru-
1AB383360031
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBGJTAA
thru-
WOTRBGN-
TAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360032 DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBGPTAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360033
thru-
1AB383360041
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBGRTAA
thru-
WOTRBGZTAA
4FC-OD NA 1AB383360042
1AB383360046
DWDM 4.55G
OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM
WOTRBG0TAA
thru-
WOTRBGZTAA
Client
4FCLC-L LC-L 1AB379640002 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1310
nm
NG17ANWMAA
4FCSN-I SN-I 1AB379640001 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 850
nm - Hardened
-
1AB379640003
(ETR)
NGI7AUJMAA
1000B-LX 1 G SFP
1000BASE-LX
1AB376720002 B & W GbE
(1000BASE-LX/10km)
NGI7AMLMAA
1000B-SX 1 G SFP
1000BASE-SX
1AB376720001 B & W GbE
(1000BASE-SX/550m)
NGI7ANPMAA
1000B-T 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 Electrical GbE -
1000B-ZX 1 G SFP
1000BASE-ZX
1AB376720003 B & W GbE
(1000BASE-ZX/80km)
NGI7AMMMAA
GE-BX20D 1000BASE-
BX20
OC12/STM-4
20km BiDi
1AB393080006 B & W 1000BX/STM-4
(20km Downstream)
NG17AWK2AA
GE-BX20U 1000BASE-
BX20
OC12/STM-4
20km BiDi
1AB393080005 B & W 1000BX/STM-4
(20km Upstream)
NG17AWJ2AA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
GE-BX40D 1000BASE-
BX40
OC12/STM-4
40km BiDi
1AB393080010 B & W 1000BX/STM-4
(40km Downstream)
NG17AWH2AA
GE-BX40U 1000BASE-
BX40
OC12/STM-4
40km BiDi
1AB393080009 B & W 1000BX/STM-4
(40km Upstream)
NG17AWG2AA
100BLX10 100BASE-LX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP NGI7ASGMAA
FE-BX40D FE
100BASE-BX40
OC-3/STM-1
40kmBiDi
1AB393080008 B & W 100BX/FE
(40km-Downstream)
NG17AWM2AA
FE-BX40U FE
100BASE-BX40
OC-3/STM-1
40kmBiDi
1AB393080007 B & W 100BX/FE
(40km-Upstream)
NG17AWL2AA
SFEBTEE 100BASE-T 1AB310140001 SFP FE/FDDI
100BASE-T EL W/Ext
Temp
-
SL-1.1 L-1.1/LR-1,
30km
1AB376350002 ALU SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMFMAA
SL-1.2 L-1.2,155M,
SM,80km
1AB376350003 ALU SFP L-1.2 -40/+85 NGI7AMGMAA
SS-1.1 S-1.1/IR-1,15km 1AB376350001 ALU SFP S-1.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMEMAA
SL-4.1 L-4.1/LR-1,
40km
1AB376360002 ALU SFP L-4.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMJMAA
SL-4.2 L4.2,SM,80km 1AB376360003 ALU SFP L-4.2 -40/+85 NGI7AMKMAA
SS-4.1 S-4.1/IR-1,15km 1AB376360001 ALU SFP S-4.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMHMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200001 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANFMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200002 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANGMAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-69
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200003 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANHMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200004 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANJMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200005 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANKMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200006 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANLMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200007 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANMMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200008 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7ANNMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200009 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUHMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200010 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUNMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200011 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUPMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200012 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AURMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200013 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUSMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200014 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(80km)
NGI7AUTMAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-70 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200015 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(80km))
NGI7AUUMAA
SL-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
80km
1AB377200016 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(80km)
NGI7AUVMAA
SS-16.1A 2G5 MR
SFP(S-16.1/
IR-1)
1AB376370005 B & W STM-16/OC-48
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(IR-1)
WMU1AF2CAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM7MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160002 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM8MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160003 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17AM9MAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160004 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7 Gbps
(40km)
NG17ANAMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160005 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(40km)
NG17ANBMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160006 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(40km)
NG17ANCMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160007 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(40km)
NG17ANDMAA
SS-16.2C 2G5 MR
CWDM SFP
40km
1AB377160008 CWDM 2G5 MR
multirate ≤2.7
Gbps(40km)
NG17ANEMAA
SI-16.1 I-16.1/SR-1 1AB376370001 B & W
STM-16/OC-48/OUT-1
NGI7AMTMAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-71
Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)
Mne-
monic
Standards APN Description CLEI Code
SL-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 1AB376370003 ALU SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 NGI7ANRMAA
1AB376370007
(ETR)
ALU SFP L-16.1
-40/+85
-
SL-16.2 L-16.2/LR-2 1AB376370004 ALU SFP L-16.2 -5/+85 NGI7ANSMAA
1AB376370008
(ETR)
ALU SFP L-16.2
-40/+85
-
Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment” (p. 2-72) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device common equipment.
Table 2-10 1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code
MD4HKIT PSS-1 MD4H Shelf Kit
(includes integrated MD4H
(2xPSS1MD4), EDFANUP,
EDPFDCx2)
8DG59884AA —
PSS1MD4H MD4H Edge Device 8DG59885AA —
EDCVR Edge Device Shelf Cover - EIA 8DG59494AA —
DUJSME1 Duplex JUMPER S.M.
LC/PC-LC/PC 1.4m ETSI
1AB215120060 —
DUJSMN1 Duplex JUMPER S.M.
LC/PC-LC/PC 1.4m NAR
1AB215120061 —
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-72 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits” (p. 2-73) lists the ordering information
for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device kits and their contents.
Table 2-11 1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code Content items
EDINST19 Edge Device
Installation Kit
(19-inch rack)
8DG59655AA — 1: Shelf Cover
4: 12-24 screws
6: M2.5 x 5 FH screws
2: 19” shelf mounting ear
2: NAR Power Cable
(3.6m)
1: SFP removal tool
1: LC fiber removal tool
EDINST23 Edge Device
Installation Kit
(ANSI Rack)
8DG59655AB — 1: shelf cover
4: 12-24 screws
6: M2.5 x 5 FH screws
2: 23” shelf mounting ear
2: NAR power cable
(3.6m)
1: SFP removal tool
1: LC fiber removal tool
EDINSTET Edge Device
Installation Kit
(ETSI Rack)
8DG59655AC — 4: M6 x 12 thread forming
screw
6: M2.5 x 5 FH screws
2: ETSI mounting ear
2: ETSI power cable (3.6)
1: SFP removal tool
1: LC fiber removal tool
EDWLMNT ED Shelf Wall
Mount Kit
8DG59733AA — 1: 1830 Edge Device wall
mount
8: M2.5 x 5 FH screws
10: #10 x 3/4” hex flange
head wood screws
10: washers
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-73
Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items” (p. 2-74) lists the
ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items.
Table 2-12 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code
EDFANUP Edge Device Fan
Unit User Panel
integrated
8DG59379AA WOPQAB1RAA
EDAIRFLT Edge Device Dust
Filter
8DG59648AA —
EDPFDC Edge Device Power
Filter (DC)
8DG59382AA WOPUABDMAA
Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment” (p. 2-74) lists the ordering
information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment.
Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code
EDHSFB ED Filter Blank
(half-slot)
8DG59658AA —
EDFSFB ED Filter Blank (full
slot)
8DG59691AA —
EDPSFB ED Power Filter
Blank
8DG59659AA —
EDHSLAD Half-slot adapter
(filter slot)
8DG59642AA —
E_SFC1A Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59592HA WOCUANFUAA
E_SFC1B Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59592HB WOCUANUUAA
E_SFC1C Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59592HC WOCUANMUAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-74 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code
E_SFC1D Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59592HD WOCUANNUAA
E_SFC1E Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (E
Variant)
8DG59592HE WOCUANPUAA
E_SFC1F Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (F
Variant)
8DG59592HF WOCUANRUAA
E_SFC1G Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (G
Variant)
8DG59592HG WOCUANSUAA
E_SFC1H Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 1 Channel (H
Variant)
8DG59592HH WOCUANTUAA
E_SFC2A Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59601HA WOCUANVUAA
E_SFC2B Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59601HB WOCUANWUAA
E_SFC2C Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (C
Variant)
8DG59601HC WOCUANXUAA
E_SFC2D Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 2 Channel (D
Variant)
8DG59601HD WOCUANYUAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-75
Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment (continued)
Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code
E_SFC4A Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 4 Channel (A
Variant)
8DG59593HA WOCUAN0UAA
E_SFC4B Edge Device - Static
Filter Hardened
CWDM 4 Channel (B
Variant)
8DG59593HB WOCUAN1UAA
E_SFC8 CWDM 8 Channel
Static Filter Hardened
8DG59594HA WOCUANZUAA
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-76 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Technical specifications
Purpose
This section provides technical specifications for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
Power
This section provides the power specifications for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
and its external power options.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
A fully populated 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will draw a maximum of 110 Watts
(90 Watts typical).
Power filter input
The input voltage for power filters on the 1830 PSS-1 have the following specifications:
Table 2-14 Power filter input specifications
System voltage Input range
-48 Vdc -40.5 Vdc to -57 Vdc
-60 Vdc -50 Vdc to -72 Vdc
SFP sensitivity and power
The information in the table on the following pages identifies the sensitivity and power
information for SFPs used with the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. For comprehensive
information for SFPs, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16
(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-77
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
76
37
00
03
SF
PL
-1
6.1
-5
/+
85
(B
&W
ST
M-1
6/O
C-4
8
DD
M1
31
0n
m
(L
-1
6.1
/L
R-1
))
SL
-1
6.1
SS
MF
-1
+2
-2
+3
-2
9-2
7-9
1A
B3
76
37
00
07
(E
TR
)
SF
PL
-1
6.1
-4
0/+
85
(B
&W
ST
M-1
6/O
C-4
8
DD
M1
31
0n
m
(L
-1
6.1
/L
R-1
))
SL
-1
6.1
SS
MF
-1
+2
-2
+3
-2
9-2
7-9
1A
B3
77
20
00
01
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
14
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
02
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
14
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
03
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
04
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
31
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
77
20
00
05
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
51
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
06
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
07
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
08
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
16
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
MC
H1
61
0)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
9S
FP
CW
DM
-L
H
14
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
10
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
14
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-79
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
77
20
00
11
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
12
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
31
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
13
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
51
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
14
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
15
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
15
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
77
20
00
16
SF
PC
WD
M-L
H
16
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
AP
D(<
2.7
G)
DD
MC
H1
61
0)
SL
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-3
0-2
8-8
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-80 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
76
37
00
05
SF
PS
S-1
6.1
A
AN
YR
AT
E
-4
0/+
85
(B
lack
an
d
Wh
ite
ST
M-1
6/O
C-
48
/O
TU
-1
Mu
ltirate
[<
2.7
G]
DD
M1
31
0n
m)
(S
S-1
6.1
A)
2G
5M
RS
FP
SS
-1
6.1
AS
SM
F-4
-1
-5
0-2
0-1
80
1A
B3
77
16
00
01
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
14
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
02
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
14
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
03
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
04
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
31
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
05
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
51
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-81
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
77
16
00
06
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
07
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
08
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
16
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B1
55
07
00
01
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
02
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
03
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
04
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
05
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
06
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-82 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B1
55
07
00
07
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B1
55
07
00
08
CW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
CW
DM
4F
C-O
CS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
1A
B3
83
36
00
03
DW
DM
4.5
5G
OT
U1
/S
FP
4F
C
DW
DM
4F
C-O
DS
SM
F-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.3
-1
7.3
-1
Clien
t
1A
B3
79
64
00
02
SF
PF
C/2
FC
/4
FC
13
00
NM
(B
&W
1G
/2
G/4
GF
ib
re
Ch
an
nel
DD
M
13
10
nm
(L
C-L
))
4F
CL
C-L
SS
MF
-7
.4-2
-8
.4-1
-1
9.1
-1
7.1
-1
1A
B3
79
64
00
03
(E
TR
)
SF
PF
C/2
FC
/4
FC
85
0N
M(B
&W
1G
/2
G/4
GF
ib
re
Ch
an
nel
DD
M
85
0n
m(S
N-I))
4F
CS
N-I
MM
F-8
-1
-9
0-1
6.1
-1
4.1
0
1A
B3
79
64
00
01
SF
PF
C/2
FC
/4
FC
85
0N
M(B
&W
1G
/2
G/4
GF
ib
re
Ch
an
nel
DD
M
85
0n
m(S
N-I))
4F
CS
N-I
MM
F-8
-1
-9
0-1
6.1
-1
4.1
0
1A
B3
76
72
00
02
SF
PG
BE
LX
-4
0/+
85
(B
&W
1G
bE
DD
M
13
10
nm
(1
00
0B
AS
E-L
X))
10
00
BA
SE
-L
XS
SM
F-8
-4
-9
-3
-2
1.5
-1
9.5
-3
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-83
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
76
72
00
01
SF
PG
BE
SX
-4
0/+
85
(B
&W
1G
bE
DD
M8
50
nm
(1
00
0B
AS
E-S
X))
10
00
BA
SE
-S
XM
MF
-8
.5-1
-9
.50
-1
9-1
70
1A
B3
59
78
00
02
SF
PG
BE
T
-4
0/+
85
(1
00
0B
AS
E-T
)
10
00
B-T
1N
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
A
1A
B3
76
72
00
03
B&
W
Gb
E(1
00
0B
AS
E-
ZX
/8
0k
m)
10
00
B-Z
XS
SM
F+
1+
40
5-2
6-2
4+
1
1A
B3
93
08
00
06
10
00
BA
SE
-B
X2
0
OC
12
/S
TM
-4
20
km
BiD
i
GE
-B
X2
0D
SS
MF
–5
-1
-6
0-2
2.5
-2
0.5
1
1A
B3
93
08
00
05
10
00
BA
SE
-B
X2
0
OC
12
/S
TM
-4
20
km
BiD
i
GE
-B
X2
0U
SS
MF
–5
-1
-6
0-2
2.5
-2
0.5
1
1A
B3
93
08
00
10
10
00
BA
SE
-B
X4
0
OC
12
/S
TM
-4
40
km
BiD
i
GE
-B
X4
0D
SS
MF
-2
+1
-3
+2
-2
7-2
5-3
1A
B3
93
08
00
09
10
00
BA
SE
-B
X4
0
OC
12
/S
TM
-4
40
km
BiD
i
GE
-B
X4
0U
SS
MF
-2
+1
-3
+2
-2
7-2
5-3
1A
B3
82
18
00
01
Fast
Eth
ern
et
SF
P
10
0B
AS
E-L
X1
0
10
0B
-L
X1
0S
S
MF
-1
9-1
5-2
0-1
4-3
3
(B
ER
1E
-1
0)
-3
1
(B
ER
1E
-1
2)
-3
1
(B
ER
1E
-1
0)
-2
7
(B
ER
1E
-1
2
-1
4
1A
B3
93
08
00
07
B&
W1
00
BX
/F
E
(4
0k
m-U
pstream
)
FE
-B
X4
0U
SS
MF
-4
-1
-5
0-3
4-3
2-3
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-84 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
10
14
00
01
SF
PF
E/F
DD
I
10
0B
AS
E-T
EL
W/E
xt
Tem
p
10
0B
AS
E-T
1N
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
A
1A
B3
76
35
00
02
SF
PL
-1
.1-4
0/+
85
(B
&W
ST
M-1
/O
C-3
DD
M1
31
0n
m
(L
-1
.1/L
R-1
)
SL
-1
.1S
SM
F-4
-1
-5
0-3
6-3
4-1
0
1A
B3
76
35
00
03
AL
US
FP
L-1
.2
-4
0/+
85
SL
-1
.2S
SM
F-4
-1
-5
0-3
6-3
4-1
0
1A
B3
76
35
00
01
AL
US
FP
S-1
.1
-4
0/+
85
SS
-1
.1S
SM
F-1
4-9
-1
5-8
-3
0-2
8-1
0
1A
B3
76
36
00
02
SF
PL
-4
.1-4
0/+
85
(B
&W
ST
M-4
/O
C-1
2
DD
M1
31
0n
m
(L
-4
.1/L
R-1
))
SL
-4
.1S
SM
F-2
+1
-3
2-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
76
36
00
01
AL
US
FP
S-4
.1
-4
0/+
85
SS
-4
.1S
SM
F-1
4-9
-1
5-8
-3
0-2
8-8
1A
B3
76
37
00
05
SF
PS
S-1
6.1
A
AN
YR
AT
E
-4
0/+
85
(B
lack
an
d
Wh
ite
ST
M-1
6/O
C-
48
/O
TU
-1
Mu
ltirate
[<
2.7
G]
DD
M1
31
0n
m)
(S
S-1
6.1
A)
2G
5M
RS
FP
SS
-1
6.1
AS
SM
F-4
-1
-5
0-2
0-1
80
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-85
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
77
16
00
01
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
14
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
02
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
14
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
03
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
04
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
31
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
05
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
51
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
06
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
71
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
77
16
00
07
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
15
91
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-86 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table
2-15
SFP
specifications
(continued)
APN
Description
Mnem
onic
Fiber
Type
Launch
Pow
er
Receiver
Sensitivity
Re-
ceiver
Over-
load
Min
BO
L
(dBm
)
Max
BO
L
(dBm
)
Min
EO
L
(dBm
)
Max
EO
L
(dBm
)
Min
(dBm
)
EO
L
(dBm
)
Line
(O
TU
1)
1A
B3
77
16
00
08
SF
PC
WD
M-S
H
16
11
NM
(C
WD
M
2.5
GM
ultirate
PIN
(<
2.7
G)
DD
M)
SS
-1
6.2
CS
SM
F+
1+
40
+5
-2
0.5
-1
8.5
0
1A
B3
76
37
00
01
B&
W
ST
M-1
6/O
C-
48
/O
UT
-1
SI-1
6.1
SS
MF
-4
-1
-5
0-2
0-1
80
1A
B3
76
37
00
04
SF
PL
-1
6.2
-5
/+
85
(B
lack
an
dW
hite
ST
M-1
6/O
C-4
8
DD
M1
31
0n
m)
(L
-1
6.2
/L
R-2
)
SL
-1
6.2
SS
MF
-1
+2
-2
+3
-3
0-2
8-9
1A
B3
76
37
00
08
(E
TR
)
SF
PL
-1
6.2
-4
0/+
85
(B
lack
an
d
Wh
ite
ST
M-1
6/O
C-4
8
DD
M1
31
0n
m)
(L
-1
6.2
/L
R-2
)
SL
-1
6.2
SS
MF
-1
+2
-2
+3
-3
0-2
8-9
Notes:
1.
100B
AS
E-T
/1000B
AS
E-T
are
electrical
SF
Ps
and
the
given
specifications
are
not
applicable
to
them
.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-87
Optical filter insertion loss specifications
Table 2-16 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC1 Loss Value Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i _OUT 1.5 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → EXP_OUT 1.3 dB
Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.0 dB
Table 2-17 SFC2 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC2 Loss Value Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i _OUT 1.8 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch EXP_OUT 1.5 dB
Insertion Loss EXP-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.3 dB
Table 2-18 SFC4 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC4 Loss Value Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 4/8 _OUT 1.4 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 3/7 _OUT 1.7 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 _OUT 2 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 1/5 _OUT 2.3 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Exp_OUT 2.2 dB
Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 1.7 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 4/8_In → OMD-OUT 1.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 3/7_In → OMD-OUT 1.5 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 2/6_In → OMD-OUT 1.2 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 1/5_In → OMD-OUT 0.9 dB
Table 2-19 SFC8 Optical Insertion Loss
SFC8 Loss Value Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 1_OUT 1.4 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 8_OUT 1.7 dB
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-88 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 2-19 SFC8 Optical Insertion Loss (continued)
SFC8 Loss Value Unit
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 _OUT 2 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 7_OUT 2.0 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 6_OUT 2.3 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 5_OUT 2.6 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 4_OUT 2.9 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 3_OUT 3.2 dB
Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2_OUT 3.5 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 1_In→ OMD-OUT 0.9 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 2_In → OMD-OUT 1.2 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 3_In → OMD-OUT 1.5 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 4_In → OMD-OUT 1.8 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 5_In → OMD-OUT 2.1 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 6_In → OMD-OUT 2.4 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 7_In → OMD-OUT 2.7 dB
Insertion Loss Ch 8_In → OMD-OUT 3.0 dB
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
2-89
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-90 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3 3Installation and System
turn up
Overview
Purpose
This chapter includes procedures necessary for installation and provisioning 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device, including mounting, cabling, powering and provisioning. Additional
procedures such as installing pluggable modules and cleaning optical fibers are also
included in this chapter.
Illustrations in procedures relating to physical installation of the PSS-1 depict the PSS-1
GBEH. However, the procedures for basic physical installation are identical and can be
applied for all PSS-1 variants.
Installation covers the physical mounting of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device, the
running and connecting of power cables, interconnecting cables, alarm cables, and as
required, communication cables.
System turn up covers establishing of the system parameters, synchronization and to
provision a network element (NE) to get it ready to operate in the network.
Contents
Before you begin 3-3
Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-6
Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-11
Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-12
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction 3-20
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal 3-22
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs 3-23
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database 3-24
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access 3-29
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-1
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load; commit the
software
3-31
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode 3-37
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address 3-38
Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port 3-39
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time 3-40
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs 3-41
Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties 3-42
Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system access 3-43
Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links 3-50
Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning 3-51
Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server 3-52
Installation and System turn up Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Before you begin
Before you begin
Prior to performing any procedures in this chapter, review Chapter 1, “Safety”.
Note: Any Command Line Interface (CLI) commands associated with carrying out
procedures are listed in this chapter. CLI commands are in bold type text and are
entered by the user performing the procedures; example: <CTRL>B Go back one
character on the CLI screen display.
Installation and System turn up Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-3
Translation — VCCI statement
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is
used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user
may be required to take corrective actions.
Installation and System turn up Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Safety labeling
Figure 3-1, “Showing compliance and safety warnings” (p. 3-5) shows an example of the
Alcatel-Lucent labeling on the 1830 PSS-1 Edge device. This label provides compliance
and safety warnings. Please check the labeling on your specific PSS-1 unit for details that
apply to your product.
Figure 3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings
Installation and System turn up Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-5
Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device
Purpose
A mounting kit is available with the hardware needed to install an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device on a vertical surface. (See Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits”
(p. 2-73).)
Use this procedure and the following procedures to install and provision 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device. These procedures reference the detailed level procedures for
performing the specific tasks required.
Required equipment for Installation and Provisioning
• Personal Computer (PC), refer to Procedure 4-2: “Personal computer requirements
and provisioning” (p. 4-4), for PC requirements and to establish a CLI session.
• #2 Phillips screw driver
• T8, T20, and T25 Torx drivers
• Drill with 2.5 mm drill bit (vertical installation only)
• a fiber scope for LC fibers
• an ESD wrist strap
• an SFP removal tool
• Necessary fiber cleaning equipment, refer to Procedure 4-9: “Cleaning optical
connectors” (p. 4-15)
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device on a vertical
surface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the mounting location.
Note: It is recommended that you use plywood approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick
as a mounting surface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Position the vertical mounting bracket on the vertical mounting surface, and use it as a
template to mark the location for a single, first mounting screw.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using a 2.5mm bit, drill the hole for the first mounting screw.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Place one of the #10 screws, with one of the supplied washers, and screw it 80% of the
way into the hole.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Hang the vertical mounting bracket on the first screw.
Figure 3-2 Marking initial mounting screw location
Figure 3-3 Initial mounting screw placement
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Align the bracket and use it as a template to mark the position of the remaining screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Drill the holes for the remaining screws, and install the screws with the supplied washers,
make sure that all screws, including the first one are tight.
Figure 3-4 Hanging vertical mounting bracket for alignment
Figure 3-5 Marking screw placement for vertical mounting bracket
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Gently lower the unit into the mounting bracket.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Push the unit toward the mounting surface until the unit is vertical.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Secure the unit to the bracket using three of the provided M2.5 x 5 mm pan head screws
on each side.
Figure 3-6 Securing all mounting screws
Figure 3-7 Placement of unit in vertical mounting bracket
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-9
Figure 3-8 Securing unit in vertical mounting bracket
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device
Procedure
Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. (See Table 2-11, “1830
PSS-1 MD4H installation kits” (p. 2-73).)
Complete the following steps to install 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an equipment
rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the mounting location.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Mount bay frame brackets to unit using 3 T8 screws per side.
Note: There are two sets of threaded holes on each side of the unit. Use the holes
closest to the front for a 2 ¼” protrusion, or the rear holes for a 5” protrusion.
Front holes are also used for ETSI 300 mm deep mounting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using the screws provided (EAI and ANSI kits come with four 12-24 screws, ETSI
comes with four M6x1 screws), secure the unit to the desired position in the bay frame
with each screw installed loosely to allow proper positioning of the screw holes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Once all 4 screws are in place, tighten them securely.
Figure 3-9 Bay frame bracket installation
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-11
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
Powering and provisioning procedure
Complete the following steps to apply power and provision 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or
Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for
IBN applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device. A
ground cable is not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The
ground wire should be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2
cross section) at a minimum and have a
FCI/Burndy YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 in. spacing.
Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground
cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm may damage the equipment.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Bay frame must be properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and
non-conductive coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal
must be clean and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only
thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Measure resistance between the case of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device and the
CBN or IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure power supply for device is shut off at BDFB or AC power supply.
Note: The AC power supply must be provided with 15 A Max over-current protection
to protect the 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) wiring to the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
Figure 3-10 Rear ground attachment points
CAUTION
Use screws pro
vided withth
isequipment fo
r ground connectio
n
Use screws pro
vided withth
isequipment fo
r ground connectio
n
Screws longer th
an 8mmmay damage th
isequipment
Screws longer th
an 8mmmay damage th
isequipment
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Connect A and B power cables to customer provided power supply cables using table
Table 3-1, “Office power connection and cable color” (p. 3-14)
Note: In the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device, the battery return conductor is an
Isolated DC return (DC-I).
Table 3-1 Office power connection and cable color
Office power connection Cable color
A Battery - Blue
A Return + Red
A Ground Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
B Battery - Blue
B Return + Red
B Ground Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Test continuity of A and B power cables using Table 3-2, “Test and expected results”
(p. 3-15) for each cable.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 3-2 Test and expected results
Test point 1 Test point 2 Expected measurement
Pin 1 Pin 3 Open circuit
Pin 3 Pin 2 Minimal closed circuit, dependent on wire length
(~1 ohm)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Connect power cables to power filters. Route cables to the left to provide access to filter
ports and for air filter replacement.
Figure 3-11 Power Cable
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert a half-size pack adapter, if required (consult shelf-specific, customer
documentation). There are two sizes of filter circuit packs, a full size 8 channel pack and
half size 4, 2, or 1 channel packs. Half-size packs require that a half-size pack adapter be
installed prior to inserting the filter circuit pack(s). The half-size pack adapter is held in
place by the filter circuit packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Insert Filter circuit pack(s) as specified by the customer in shelf-specific documentation.
If only one half-size circuit pack is to be installed, install it on the left side.
Figure 3-12 Power cables installed
Figure 3-13 Half size pack adapter
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Note: Figure 3-14, “Filter pack installed” (p. 3-17), shows installation in a PSS-1
GBEH. Installation is the same in PSS-1 MD4H and PSS-1 MSAH units.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Insert blanks in any unused filter slots. If no filter is installed, insert the full-size blank.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Turn on A and B power at BDFB or AC power supply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Verify power connections using Table 3-3, “Power connection test and Results” (p. 3-17)
Table 3-3 Power connection test and Results
Test Expected Results
Shut off power A at BDFB or AC power
supply, with corresponding power B turned on
Power Filter A status LED extinguishes
Power Filter B status LED remains lit
Shut off power B at BDFB or AC power
supply, with corresponding power A turned on
Power Filter B status LED extinguishes
Power Filter A status LED remains lit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Set the Shelf ID using Shelf ID selector switch on lower left of shelf. Choose from the
options in Table 3-4, “Shelf ID and Settings” (p. 3-18).
Figure 3-14 Filter pack installed
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-17
Table 3-4 Shelf ID and Settings
Shelf Shelf ID setting
Master 1
Peer shelf 1 2
Peer shelf 2 3
Peer shelf 3 4
Peer shelf 4 5
Peer shelf 5 6
Peer shelf 6 7
Peer shelf 7 8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Verify that the PSS-1 air filter is installed (see Procedure 4-13: “Fan air filter
replacement” (p. 4-23)).
Note: The PSS-1 air filter should be removed when using the unit in Outside Plant
Applications (-40C to +65C). The Outside Plant application requires cabinets to either
have their own filters or be a closed-loop system.
Figure 3-15 Shelf ID
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Connect shelf-to-shelf LAN cables (not supported in this release). LAN cables should be
“daisy chained” from port “LAN E2” of the master shelf to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf
1, then from Port “LAN E2” of Peer shelf 1 to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf 2, and so on.
Cables should not enter and exit directly to the right, as this will block removal and
replacement of the air filter for maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports, per shelf-specific
customer documentation. All fibers should exit to the left, if possible, to allow access to
air filter for periodic replacement. Turn angled boots on each fiber toward the direction
the fiber exits the shelf.
Note: PSS-1 GBEH shelf shown above.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Fiber slack should be coiled neatly, using the hook-and-loop fasteners included in the
installation kit.
Figure 3-16 Fibers
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Insert SFP extraction tool into SFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Pull on body of SFP extraction tool to remove SFP.
Figure 3-17 Push in wedge
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.
Figure 3-18 Pull out SFP
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-21
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Grasp LC fiber connector with LC connector end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Squeeze XFP extractor/LC connector tool until blue locking tab on LC connector is
depressed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Pull on XFP extractor/LC connector tool to remove LC connector.
Figure 3-19 LC fiber tool
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs
Objective
Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in the previous procedures and is ready
for initial set up.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted
correctly. Verify the fibers are properly run between packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure they are run properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the shelf is powered up and the green led is lit on both power filter modules.
Verify that the fans are running.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fully seat all circuit packs in the shelf if they have not already been seated.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-23
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
Purpose
You can connect directly to the network element (NE) to access the web interface
(webUI). No client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer.
The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will ship with software and a factory image. This
procedure will provide the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using webUI
and creating an initial database.
Procedure
Note: SUN Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the PC.
Note: Popup blockers must be turned off in Internet Explorer.
Note: The network element is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port must be
configured to obtain an IP address automatically.
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the webUI using Internet Explorer via the CIT port on the FAN unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the FAN unit. Connect the other
end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Verify that the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.2. Refer to Figure 3-20, “PC command
window” (p. 3-25).
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the CIT port in the Address bar. The
default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Go. The browser connects to the network element and the webUI login window is
displayed. See Figure 3-21, “Login Screen” (p. 3-26).
Figure 3-20 PC command window
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter admin in the “User:” field and admin in the “Password:” field. Then click the
“Login” button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 A Warning message will appear similar to Figure 3-22, “WebUI uninitialized database
warning” (p. 3-27), indicating that the database is uninitialized.
Figure 3-21 Login Screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click OK and the system will automatically restart after initialization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 After the restart is complete, the system will prompt you for a new NE name as shown in
Figure 3-23, “WebUI NE name prompt” (p. 3-28). Type the NE name provided in the site
documentation.
Figure 3-22 WebUI uninitialized database warning
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Submit and the system will restart once again. The restart will take approximately 2
minutes. A window will appear showing the restart progress as shown in Figure 3-24,
“WebUI NE restart progress window” (p. 3-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 After restart is complete, the webUI interface will open with the system properties view.
Figure 3-23 WebUI NE name prompt
Figure 3-24 WebUI NE restart progress window
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access
Overview
After completing the database initialization using webUI, you can connect directly to the
network element to access the CLI. No client software is needed on your PC for either
application, only a Telnet application. The remaining procedures in this chapter will be
completed using CLI.
Procedure
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the CLI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT
port is active on the master shelf only. Note that this is the same connection used for the
webUI interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the
FAN unit. Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hit <Enter> and the “login:” prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type cli at the “Password:” prompt and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 This starts the cli interface, and another “Username:” prompt will appear. Type admin and
<Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the “Password:” prompt type admin and <Enter>. This will bring up the following
warning notice.
1830 PSS-1, WAVELENGTH TRACKER
Alcatel-Lucent
(c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Welcome to the CLI
Warning Notice
This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized
users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or
attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-29
system is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized
users are subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or
criminal and civil penalties under state, federal, or other
applicable domestic and foreign laws. Use of this system may be
monitored and recorded for administrative and security reasons.
Anyone accessing this system expressly consents to such
monitoring and is advised that if monitoring reveals possible
evidence of criminal activity, Alcatel-Lucent may provide the
evidence of such activity to law enforcement officials. All
users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent Corporate Instructions
regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent information assets.
Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type Y and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 The current alarm summary will be displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI
commands can now be entered. Type ? for a list of commands.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load;
commit the software
Purpose
The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is
pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that will be run in the
network. You must therefore perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct
software load on the NE.
The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first procedure is to
prepare the FTP server on the NE. Then follow the CLI procedure for software download
and activation.
FTP server preparation
Note: Refer to Procedure 3-19: “Example configuration of FTP server” (p. 3-52) for
more detailed instructions on configuring an ftp server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the userid
and password established for the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Establish a root directory for the server and make sure it has read and write privileges.
You may create a folder in the root directory that will contain the NE software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Copy the folder and sub-folders with the NE software into the ftp root directory
established above.
Note: The software folder name will have the format 1830PSS1-<ver>, where <ver>
is the version of the software to be loaded. There should also be two sub-folders
named “1830PSS1” and “1830PSS1M”. The software will typically be provided on a
CD.
PC preparation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 3-25, “Windows Firewall
settings” (p. 3-32).
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-31
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Off. Then click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Note the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC. This will be used later in the procedure. See Figure 3-20,
“PC command window” (p. 3-25).
Figure 3-25 Windows Firewall settings
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config software server ip and <Enter>.
Where <ip> is the ip address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the ip address you
obtained when using the ipconfig command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config software server userid <userid> and <Enter>.
Where <userid> is the userid of the user account defined on the ftp server.
Sample output below.
“Enter password:”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type <pw> and <Enter>.
Where <pw> is the password for the FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type config software server root <path> and <Enter>.
Where <path> is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory.
Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the
<path>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type config software server detail and <Enter>.
Sample output below.
Software Server Protocol : FTP
Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Userid : sw1
Software Server Root Directory : /
Verify the settings are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.
Sample output below.
Software Upgrade Information:
Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Root Directory : /
Committed Release :
Working Release Directory :
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-33
Working Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2
Active Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2/
Operation :
Operation Status :
Upgrade Path Available : True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Verify the current active software is an older release than the software that you are
loading.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> no backup and <Enter>.
Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.
This will check the path and verify that the system is ready for upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.
A listing of packs will be displayed along with the status showing which packs need to be
upgraded. Sample output below.
Software Upgrade Information:
Software Server IP : 192.168.0.241
Software Server Root Directory : /SVT/
Committed Release :
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS1-0.00-2/
Working Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2
Active Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2
Operation : Audit
Operation Status : Completed
Upgrade Path Available : True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Stage=0 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC
ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete
RESULT: Success
Stage=1 Step=0 SH/SL: 0/0 CARDTYPE: Empty
ACTION: Transfer to disk Planned 0% complete
RESULT: None
Stage=2 Step=0 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC
ACTION: Activate Planned 0% complete
RESULT: None
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path
Available changes to True.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Type config software upgrade manual load and <Enter>.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
This will transfer the software to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.
Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation : Load
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows “Completed.”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Type config software upgrade manual activate and <Enter>.
This will activate the software on the 1830 PSS-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The NE will reboot and the Telnet connection will drop. Wait about 2 minutes after the
fan speed drops back down to normal speed and log back into the NE. Refer to Procedure
3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 3-29).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.
Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation : Activate
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
...
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> nobackup and <Enter>.
Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Type config software upgrade commit and <Enter>.
This will commit the software to be the primary release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.
Watch for the following lines.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-35
...
Operation : Activate
Operation Status : In Progress 0%
.
Continue to execute the status command until the Operations Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 After the last status command is executed, verify the new software release is displayed as
the committed, working, and active release. See the sample output below.
Software Upgrade Information:
Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Root Directory : /
Committed Release : 1830PSS1-1.10-0
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS1-1.10-0/
Working Release :
Active Release : 1830PSS1-1.10-0/
Operation : Commit
Operation Status : Completed
Upgrade Path Available : False
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and
load; commit the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
Background
The network element defaults to SONET mode. You need to perform this procedure only
if you want the network element to operate in SDH mode.
This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up.
Procedure
If you want the network element to operate in SONET mode, skip to Procedure 3-11: “Set
the loopback IP address” (p. 3-38).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type show version and <Enter>.
Sample output:
Software Version: 1830PSS1-2.0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Copy the string after “Software Version:” This will be used as the password for the SDH
mode command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config admin mode sdh <pw> and <Enter>.
Where <pw> is the password copied in the previous step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The following Warning will appear.
WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database to be
cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to be
deleted.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type yes and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 You will be logged out. The procedure is complete.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-37
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address
Purpose
Each network element (NE) requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default
loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface loop ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.
Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The following Warning message will appear.
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result
in a warm reset of this network element.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type yes and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The CLI session will be terminated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Follow the CLI login procedure described in Procedure 3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI
access” (p. 3-29).
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port
Background
The LAN1 port is used to connect to the External Management System (EMS) and is the
main control interface to the NE. The signaling format is 10/100BaseT.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config interface fan lan1 ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.
Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-39
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time
Purpose
You can set the network element (NE) date and time manually using the network
element’s internal clock, and you can configure the unit to get this information from an
NTP server, if one is available.
Procedure (manual)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config general date <date> and <Enter>.
Where <date> is of the format yyyy mm dd.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config general time <time> and <Enter>.
Where <time> is of the format hh mm ss, and hh is between 0 and 23.
Procedure (NTP)
You can configure each network element to use up to three NTP servers, indexed by
number. The network element automatically selects the highest stratum NTP server with
which it can reliably communicate. If the network element loses communications with an
NTP server, it automatically selects the next best available server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config general ntp add <index> <IP_address> and <Enter>.
Where <index> is of the index number for the server and <IP_address> is the IP address
of the server.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs
Purpose
This procedure will ensure that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit
packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Type config admin resetNE cold and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The following Warning message will appear.
WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart.
This is a service affecting command.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type yes and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes, depending on the number of
circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-41
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties
Purpose
This procedure allows changes to system properties including temperature units and
AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and will become the default for all
ports; the value can be overridden on each individual port.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer <hours> and <Enter>.
Where <hours> is of the format <hh> [<mm>]. You can also type config general
ainstimer help for the default value and range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit,
type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and <Enter>.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
Background
The NE can connect to an Element Management System (EMS) via the OAMP port if it is
to act as a Gateway Network Element (GNE). The IP address must be provisioned and the
OAMP port enabled to use this port. In addition, an IP route must be established to route
connections to the RNEs.
Purpose
This procedure will provision and enable the OAMP port so that the NE can act as a
Gateway Network Element. The procedure will also provision the IP route information to
allow connection to RNEs. Not all NEs (that is, RNEs) require this provisioning. Refer to
the site documentation.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If using WebUI continue to “WebUI Procedure” (p. 3-43).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If using CLI continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 3-49).
WebUI Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Expand “Shelf 1” in the equipment tree and then expand “slot 6 FAN”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Lan1. The Lan1 port provisioning window will appear as shown in Figure 3-26,
“WebUI Lan1 port provisioning” (p. 3-44).
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-43
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the IP address and subnet mask as indicated in the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the Port Enabled check-box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the “Submit” button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select Administration -> Networking -> IP Routes from the top menu as shown in Figure
3-27, “WebUI IP routes menu” (p. 3-45).
Figure 3-26 WebUI Lan1 port provisioning
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-44 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The IP Routes screen is displayed as shown in Figure 3-28, “WebUI IP routes window”
(p. 3-46).
Figure 3-27 WebUI IP routes menu
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-45
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the “Create” button. The Create IP Routes screen is displayed as shown in Figure
3-29, “WebUI Create IP route window” (p. 3-47).
Figure 3-28 WebUI IP routes window
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter the parameters based on the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click the “Apply” button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Verify the new IP route is now shown in the IP routes screen as shown in Figure 3-30,
“WebUI IP routes window with new route” (p. 3-48).
Figure 3-29 WebUI Create IP route window
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-47
Figure 3-30 WebUI IP routes window with new route
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-48 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port. (Also see, Procedure 3-12: “Configure the LAN1
Ethernet port” (p. 3-39).)
Type config interface fan lan1 ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.
Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type config interface fan lan1 state up and <Enter>, to set the state of the interface to up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type config interface fan lan1 rou en and <Enter>, to enable routing on the interface.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system
access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-49
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links
Purpose
Before transmission can be established on the system, all the fiber connections must be
provisioned on the NE as topological links. Both internal and external fiber connections
must be defined.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Refer to site documentation and the physical fibering on the NE to determine all the fiber
connections. Obtain a list of these fiber connections as a reference.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Choose an internal fiber connection to provision and type config interface topology
<sh/sl/pt> internal <sh/sl/pt> and <Enter>.
Where <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf slot and port on each end of the fiber.
For example: config interface topology <?> internal <?>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check off the fiber connection from the reference list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there are additional internal fiber connections to be defined, go back to Step 2. If not,
continue.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For each external fiber connection (connection to adjacent network elements), type the
following command:
config interface topology <sh/sl/pt> external <ip> <sh2/sl2/pt2> and <Enter>.
Where <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf, slot, and port connection on the NE of the external line
fiber (typically, the OMD port).
<ip> is the loopback ip address of the adjacent NE at the far end of the line fiber.
<sh/sl2/pt2> is the shelf, slot, and port of the connection on the adjacent NE of the
external line fiber.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning
Purpose
This procedure will verify that the network element (NE) is installed and turned-up
correctly and that all system provisioning is correct.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Capture all the logging of this session and save for record keeping.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type alm and <Enter>.
Verify there are no unexpected alarms on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Type show condition and <Enter>.
Verify there are no unexpected conditions on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type show software upgrade status and <Enter>.
Verify the correct version of software has been successfully committed on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type show general detail and <Enter>.
Verify system details are correct, including IP addresses, date and time, and SONET/SDH
mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Type show shelf * and <Enter>.
Verify the shelves are properly displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Type show card inventory * and <Enter>.
Verify all installed circuit packs are properly displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type show interface topology * and <Enter>.
Verify all topological links have been provisioned correctly.
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-51
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
Background
There are many different FTP server software applications available. This procedure
provides detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms,
FileZilla. However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other FTP server
applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for
detailed instructions.
Cisco TFTP is the preferred TFTP server software as it is widely used.
Purpose
This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in “FTP server preparation”
(p. 3-31).
Prerequisites
The FTP server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla
server software can be downloaded from http://filezillaproject.
org/download.php?type=server.
Procedure
Disable the firewall on the PC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 3-25, “Windows Firewall
settings” (p. 3-32)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Off. Then click OK.
FTP server configuration using FileZilla
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Start the FileZilla server software. The Connect to Server screen will open as shown in
Figure 3-31, “FileZilla connect to server screen” (p. 3-53).
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-52 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Leave the default settings and click OK.
Figure 3-31 FileZilla connect to server screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-53
Result: The server screen will open as shown in Figure 3-32, “FileZilla server screen”
(p. 3-54).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-33, “FileZilla groups
menu” (p. 3-55).
Figure 3-32 FileZilla server screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-54 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Result: The Groups screen opens as shown in Figure 3-33, “FileZilla groups menu”
(p. 3-55).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 With the General page highlighted in the left bar, click Add on the right.
Figure 3-33 FileZilla groups menu
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-55
Result: The Add user group screen will open as shown in Figure 3-34, “FileZilla add
group screen” (p. 3-56).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter a group name in the dialogue box and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select the Shared folders page in the left bar and the Groups screen changes as shown in
Figure 3-35, “FileZilla groups shared folders screen” (p. 3-57).
Figure 3-34 FileZilla add group screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-56 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Add in the center pane, Shared Folders section.
Figure 3-35 FileZilla groups shared folders screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-57
Result: A browse screen opens as shown in Figure 3-36, “FileZilla browse folder
screen” (p. 3-58).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 software is or will be copied
to, and select it. Then click OK.
Note: You may wish to create a new folder for the software before performing this
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,
make sure the Read and Write check-boxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click Set as home dir.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Click OK to close the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-37, “FileZilla users menu”
(p. 3-59).
Figure 3-36 FileZilla browse folder screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-58 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Figure 3-37 FileZilla users menu
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-59
Result: The Users screen will open as shown in Figure 3-38, “FileZilla users screen”
(p. 3-60).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 With the General page highlighted, click Add on the right pane. The Add user account
screen opens as shown in Figure 3-39, “FileZilla add user screen” (p. 3-61).
Figure 3-38 FileZilla users screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-60 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Type a user account name in the top dialogue box.
Note: The account name will be the userid used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the
software environment and load; commit the software” (p. 3-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Select the group created in Step 7 from the drop down list and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Check Password check-box and type a password in the dialogue box.
Note: This will be the password used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the software
environment and load; commit the software” (p. 3-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Select the group created in Step 7 from the Group Membership: list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Select the Shared folders page in the left bar and the Users screen will change as shown
in Figure 3-40, “FileZilla users shared folders screen” (p. 3-62).
Figure 3-39 FileZilla add user screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-61
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Click Add.
Figure 3-40 FileZilla users shared folders screen
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-62 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Result: A browse window opens as shown in Figure 3-41, “FileZilla browse folder
window” (p. 3-63).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 software is or will be copied
to, and select it. Then click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 The folder appears in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected, make
sure the Read and Write check-boxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Click Set as home dir.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 3-41 FileZilla browse folder window
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
3-63
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-64 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4 4User Operations
Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter includes procedures necessary to support features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device
Contents
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface
(WebUI) or CLI
4-2
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning 4-4
Procedure 4-3: Software installation 4-5
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP)
Provision
4-6
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning 4-9
Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup 4-11
Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles 4-12
Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation 4-14
Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors 4-15
Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors 4-18
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components 4-19
Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement 4-20
Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement 4-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-1
Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user
interface (WebUI) or CLI
Introduction
The web interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE). You
access the web interface using Internet Explorer running on a computer that is connected
via Ethernet to the NE, either directly or over a LAN.
Hardware requirements
• Laptop or desktop computer capable of running the required software.
• Ethernet card (10 Mbps minimum, 10/100 Mbps recommended).
• It is recommended that you use a monitor capable of displaying at a resolution of
1024x768 or greater.
Software requirements
• Windows XP or Windows 2000, updated to the most recent patch level.
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or Internet Explorer 7.0, updated to the most recent patch level.
• J2SE Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 5.0. The supported version for the NE
software version you are running is included on the NE software CD-ROM.
Login to the web interface
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the WebUI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for
a CLI connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the IP address of the NE in the Address field, for example, http://123.45.6.78. The
web interface login window is displayed.
Note: The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the user name “admin” in the “Username”: field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the password “admin” in the “Password”: field. The characters you enter for the
password are not displayed.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web
user interface (WebUI) or CLI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Note: Passwords are case sensitive. If you experience difficulty logging in, verify that
the Caps Lock key is off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on the Login button, or press the Enter key.
Connect to the NE through CLI
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the CLI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for the
WebUI interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the FAN unit. Connect the other
end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Hit <Enter> and the user: prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type cli at the password: prompt and <Enter>. This will bring up a welcome message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 At the next User: prompt type admin and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the Password: prompt type admin and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 This will bring up the CLI “#” prompt. You can now enter CLI commands. Type ? for a
list of commands.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web
user interface (WebUI) or CLI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-3
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and
provisioning
PC and software requirements
Table 4-1 PC and software requirements
Item Minimum Recommended
Processor 350-MHz 500-MHz Pentium III
RAM 256 Mbyte 512 Mbyte
Disk space 120 Mbyte 120 Mbyte
Video 1024 X 768- 256 Color 1024 X 768 - 256 color
Network Interface 10/100BaseT LAN NIC with
RJ45 interface
10/100BaseT LAN NIC
with RJ45 interface
CDROM Required Required
Operating System Windows 2000 Windows 2000\Windows
XP
PC Card Slot available (FMM) Required Required
Compact Flash Card with
Adapter for ILA and TOADM.
256 MB PCMCIA Compact
Flash Card. P.N 848922639
512 MB PCMCIA
Compact Flash Card. P.N
848999835
Verify PC capabilities
It is anticipated that most customers will have a dedicated laptop personal computer (PC)
for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device applications software. However, a properly
configured desktop PC will suffice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The Table 4-1, “PC and software requirements” (p. 4-4) shows the PC requirements for
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and
provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-3: Software installation
Before you begin
Prior to performing this procedure, refer to Procedure 4-2: “Personal computer
requirements and provisioning” (p. 4-4).
Procedures for NE software installation
Initial software installation is covered in the applicable Release Notes for this product.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Initial software is always downloaded locally. Software is loaded onto a PC and then into
the network element. Remote downloads for first time installations are not possible.
Note: The Comcodes for release of software to be installed will be available on the
customer order.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-3: Software installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-5
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection
(E-SNCP) Provision
Overview
Each PSS1MD4 OTU1 is divided into 16 proprietary Virtual Time Slots (VTS)s. Services
are transported over the 2.7Gb line structure with the designated VTSs depending on the
bandwidth requirement of the service.
It also provides 1+1 dedicated, sub-50ms, ESNCP protection for services by using
out-of-band channel for status and protection signaling. Automatic Protection Switching
(APS) channel communication is established by using APS/PCC channel in ODU1
overhead of line port, thus not reducing client signal bandwidth.
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device also supports provisioning of protection switching
modes: e.g. unidirectional switching, revertive/non-revertive switching.
Unidirectional Switching:
A switching mode in which the selection decision for the service path is made
independently of the Far-End node's switch state. The APS channel is not used to
coordinate switching activity between the nodes.
Bidirectional Switching:
A switching mode in which a channel is switched to the protection path in both directions.
Switching of only one direction is not allowed. Head-end to tail-end signaling is
accomplished using the APS channel.
Non-Revertive mode:
A switching mode in which a switch of service to the protection entity is maintained even
after the working entity has recovered from the failure or the manual command to
protection that caused the switch is cleared.
Revertive switching mode:
In revertive switching, the traffic is automatically switched back to the working line when
the working line has recovered from the failure or the user command is cleared. In the
failure-recovery case, the switch back to working is delayed until working has been
continuously good for the number of minutes specified by the wait-to-restore (WTR)
parameter. In the case of clearing a user switch command, there is no delay.
Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in unidirectional protection
groups. Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in bidirectional protection
groups.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
Protection (E-SNCP) Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Procedure overview
The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information
about CLI options and parameters, see the “config aps group” in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the
WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Create an APS Group
To create a new APS group, the following attributes need to be specified via CLI or Web
Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Group ID: An integer identifier for the APS group (not needed via WebUI, WebUI will
automatically assign a group ID)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Port no.: C1-C4 client ports on PSS1MD4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Protection port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1,L2 line ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Working port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1, L2 line ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Uni/bidirectional switching
Note: If using Release 1 only unidirectional is supported.
Edit an APS Group
The user can edit the following attributes of an APS group:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The description string for the APS group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The direction mode for the APS group.
Note: Release 1 supports unidirectional only.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
Protection (E-SNCP) Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-7
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The reversion mode for the APS group: revertive or non-revertive switching.
Initialize/Clear an external switch request
The user can initialize or clear an external request on an APS group. External switch
requests are the received commands from a user interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The following options are provided by 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device:
• Lockout
• Forced Switch
• Manual Switch
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection
Protection (E-SNCP) Provision
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning
Overview
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device contains dual OTs. Each OT houses 4 multiservice
client ports and 2 OTU-1 line ports.
Client ports remain in an unassigned state until a user command to create specific client
port type is issued. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device needs to manage virtual circuits
between client ports and any of the virtual time slots (VTS) on the two line ports.
The user can provision the following port attributes:
• Specify a name and description for the port.
• Set the loopback mode
• Set the performance monitoring, specifying the connected SFC ports. For channel
parameters, this can be provisioned via Optical connection (config xc) and will be
reflected in show interface pss1md4 line port detail report.
• Set the administrative state
• Set the port attributes including the client port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)
• Set the OTU1/ODU1 attributes
• Set the line port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)
• Set the VTS through mapping between two line ports.
• Set the optical connection by specifying the port to which the OTU1 port is optically
connected.
Procedure overview
The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information
about CLI options and parameters, see the “config interface pss1md4 ” information in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line
Interface Guide.
Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the
WebUI equipment tree, select the port.
Procedure
The following procedure will set up an unprotected service, using the CLI or WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP
modules into the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Line Ports
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP
modules into the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device client Ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Configure Line OTU1 attributes by specifying the connected SFC ports and GCC status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Set the administrative state of the line interface to Up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure the attributes of the client port:
• Auto negotiation attributes
• Losprop attributes
• AINS timer attributes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Configure the Client port-to-VTS Mapping.
For example: config interface pss1md4 1/8/c1 stm4 timeslot line 1 vts 1-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set the administrative state of client port to Up.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify GNE node
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision loopback address for all nodes in the network using the config interface
loopback command, as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enable GCC status for all nodes in the network using the config interface pss1md4
shelf/slot/{L1, L2} otu1 command, as detailed in the config interface pss1md4 information
in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Commands Guide
(Volume II).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 At GNE nodes: Connect LAN cable to OAMP port (LAN1). Provision OAMP IP, admin
state and enable OSPF routing (routestate) using the config interface fan lan1 command
as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure the default route and set the distribution mode to redistribution using the config
cn route default add command, as detailed in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-11
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles
Purpose
As the PM data is collected, the attribute counters in the active bin get incremented or
updated each time an event, such as an errored second, occurs. If desired, it is possible to
configure and assign a profile to an interval to monitor the value of each attribute in the
active bin and raise a log event when a certain threshold level is reached. When a
specified threshold is crossed a log event is raised. You can configure each PM group
with up to eight profiles, all having different threshold levels. The NE provides the ability
to modify all TCA profiles.
The threshold levels you define in the profiles depend on two factors:
• the interval length. For example, if you were gathering statistics for an interface over
15 minute and 24 hour intervals you would need to define two profiles, one that
defines the threshold values for the 15 minute interval and one that defines thresholds
for the 24 hour interval.
• the service level of the traffic using the interface.
There are 9 instances of each profile type supported. Profile instance 0 is used to disable
TCAs for the group. Profiles with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-min
defaults preloaded while profile with index 8 contains 1-day defaults preloaded.
Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0 values and can be customized by user. The system
supports the following TCA profile types:
• OC_N (SONET port section monitoring)
• STM_N (SDH port section monitoring)
• DW (OTU2 and ODU2 layer PM parameters)
• ETH (Ethernet group)
• INF (Interface group)
• PCS (PCS layer monitoring for Ethernet/FC ports)
• CP (Equipment PM parameters, applicable to EC)
• OPR (Optical Power Received on OT and OSC ports)
• OPT (Optical Power Transmitted on OT and OSC ports)
Testing for threshold crossings (TCAs)
The data for each PM group is queried and tested for threshold crossings at the following
intervals. A TCA event is raised as soon as a threshold crossing is detected:
Optical power PM groups: Once every five minutes
All other PM groups: Once every 10 seconds
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Note: The PM groups are also queried and tested for threshold crossings when the
contents of the raw bin are viewed. This query is in addition to the regularly
scheduled queries.
Determining which interfaces and cards to configure to collect PM data
The cards and interfaces on the network element determine the PM groups for which you
need to create profiles. Card-level statistics are gathered by the Card (CP in TL1) PM
group.
Note: It is recommended that you create a document that lists the shelf, slot, and port
of all of the interfaces on the NE that you need configure, along with the PM group,
or groups, that apply to each interface.
Viewing performance monitoring data
Performance monitoring data is recorded in logs or in bins. The logs record all of the
threshold crossing events that occurred on the network element. The bins hold data
gathered on a specific card or interface over a specific interval. In addition to the interval
bins, there is a raw bin for each PM group that continues to gather data until cleared.
Configuring performance monitoring
The major steps in high-level performance monitoring configuration are as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the interfaces you need to configure to collect performance monitoring data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Configure the profiles to define the threshold levels at which log events are generated for
the PM groups you will be monitoring on the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Configure each of the interfaces on the network element for which you will be collecting
performance monitoring statistics. You need to define which PM statistics are gathered,
the interval period over which they are gathered, and the profile used for each interval
period.
For the latest detailed information about CLI options and parameters, see the config
interface PSS1MD4 shelf/slot/C{1-12} pm information in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-13
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation
Overview
PSS-1 GBEH, MD4H, and MSAH units that are capable of supporting ETR operation
must be completely equipped with cards and plugins that support ETR operation. The
PSS-1 AHP and PSS-1 GBE units do not support ETR operation. Operation of non-ETR
capable units, cards, or plugins in an ETR environment can result in hardware damage.
ETR provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify the ETR status of all hardware by using the "show card inventory" command. If
"ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field for all components,
the hardware is ETR qualified. If it is missing from any component, the unit should not be
used in an ETR environment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use "show general detail" to view the ETR capability status of the PSS-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the unit is qualified for ETR operation, and will be used in an ETR environment, use
"config general etr enabled" to configure the unit for ETR operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the unit is not qualified for ETR operation, or will not be used in an ETR environment,
use "config general etr disabled" to configure the unit for non-ETR operation.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors
Materials and tools
For proper cleaning, the equipment and materials in the following table are
recommended:
Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors
Product Model Comcode ITE # Installation
Order #
Optical Fiber
Scope
Noyes OFS
300-200X
408463636 ITE-7129 33712900
2.5-mm
Universal
Adapter Cap
For use with the
Noyes OFS
300-200X
408197044 ITE-7129D1 33712901
1.25-mm
Universal
Adapter Cap
For use with the
Noyes OFS
300-200X
408197069 ITE-7129D2 33712902
Video Fiber
Scope*
Noyes VFS- 408356830 ITE-7146 4171600
1.25-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356848 ITE-7146D1 33714601
2.5-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356855 ITE-7146D2 33714602
FC Adapter For VFS-1 408356863 ITE-7146D3 33714603
LC Adapter For VFS-1 408356889 ITE-7146D4 33714604
SC Adapter For VFS-1 408356954 ITE-7146D5 33714605
ST Adapter For VFS-1 408356962 ITE-7146D6 33714606
Individual
Pre-Saturated
Alcohol Wipes
99% Pure
Isopropyl Alcohol
901375147 ITE-7136 33713600
CLETOP
Cleaning Cassette
Type A Reel 901375154 ITE-7137 33713700
CLETOP
Cleaning Cassette
Replacement
Reel
Type A Reel 901375014 ITE-7137 D1 33713701
Luminex Stick
Port Cleaners
1.25 mm 901375030 ITE-7134 33713400
Luminex Stick
Port Cleaners
2.5 mm 901375022 ITE-7135 33713500
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-15
Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors (continued)
Product Model Comcode ITE # Installation
Order #
Luminex Cloth 5.5” x 5.5” 408201226 R6033 23603300
Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven
effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or
materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent.
Fiber cleaning considerations
Observe the following precautions when handling fibers to prevent contaminates from
adhering to the fibers and creating potential errors and unnecessary losses:
• Assume that all fibers are dirty and must be inspected and cleaned before connection
to equipment.
• Always inspect fibers for contaminants and clean where required.
• Do not remove the protective end caps on fibers or fiber ports until ready to connect.
• If it is suspected that a fiber or port was contaminated during test or turn up
procedures, reinspect and clean as necessary.
Cleaning process
The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.
Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular to the
alcohol wipe.
Drag it against the wipe three (3) times in a figure eight pattern. This action applies the
alcohol solvent to the end-face and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid
contaminates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7. Otherwise, hold the
CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing
up.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The
lever advances the “dry” Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously
opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning
the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Insert and press the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in
the first of two slots of the cleaner.
Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the
lever of the cassette.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping
procedure using the second slot. Be sure the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning
cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position.
Continue with Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing,
cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.
Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule end-face
and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the
ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning
cloth is not available, a lint-free clean room optic wipe can be used. The Luminex
cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times. The optic wipes are single use
and disposable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-17
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors
Connector inspection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the
ferrule end-face of the fiber under inspection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The visual area of the ferrule end-face (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection
system/scope should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the
fiber end-face does not meet the following requirements:
Requirement:
No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after three
wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass
fiber end-face.
Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron (µ) diameter for both single mode
and multi-mode fibers.
Requirement:
No chips, cracks or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber end-face.
Requirement:
No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule
end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it should be immediately inserted into
the adapter build-out of the optical component. This will assure maximum cleanliness and
effectiveness of the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the cleaned connector can not be “connectorized” with a corresponding adapter, the
connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on
the ferrule, make sure the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP
stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 or 1.25 mm) and
rotate the stick 360 degrees three (3) times. Following this procedure, carefully place the
cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be
reinspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components
Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors
During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it may be necessary to clean the optical
build-out adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors,
1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the
alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while
inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner makes contact with the connector.
Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three (3)
times.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat the above cleaning
procedure. This procedure will clean the side walls of the adapter and the end-face of the
circuit pack connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into
view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process in Steps 1 - 3 if the fiber does not
meet the requirements specified in Procedure 4-10: “Inspecting optical connectors”
(p. 4-18)
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement
Overview
With a PSS-1 unit that is in-service, you should replace the FAN card without
powering-off or restarting the PSS-1. Otherwise, you must restore the database in force
mode. After the FAN is replaced, you should immediately issue the command to
synchronize the database.
Fan replacement procedure
Note: On the 1830 PSS-1, the FAN and User Panel are integrated into one unit.
You should use the following procedure to replace a FAN within PSS-1 shelf that is
in-service. If this procedure is interrupted by a restart or power cycle of the unit, use the
procedure to recover.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the NE Name, FAN LAN1 port details, loopback, IP address, and static routing
and gateway information are recorded and available in case a restart interrupts the
procedure. The user can use WEBUI and CLI to collect the information. The related CLI
commands are: show general name, show interface loopback,
show interface fan lan1, and show cn routes static.
Note: You can use the WEBUI and CLI to collect this information, using the
following commands:
• show general name
• show interface loopback
• show interface fan lan1
• show cn routes static
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If there are no database alarms, backup the current database so that it can be restored if
the procedure is interrupted by a shelf power shut down or NE restart..
Note: If there are database alarms, they must be resolved before backing up the
database and proceeding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Physically replace the 1830PSS-1 FAN (integrated Fan/User Panel).
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Note: Physical replacement of the integrated Fan/User Panel is the same on all PSS-1
models. (PSS-1 GBEH illustrated)
1. Note any cables that are connected to the fan unit. Label them if needed to insure their
correct replacement after changing the unit. Then remove any connections
2. Completely loosen the retaining screw that secures the fan unit in the PSS-1.
3. Grasp the extraction handle and pull the fan unit straight out of the PSS-1.
4. Position the new fan unit and slide it straight into the PSS-1.
5. Securely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten.
6. Restore any connections to the fan unit that were removed in Step #1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Synchronize the database and the new FAN.
You may use the WEBUI (Release 2.0 and later) menu to issue the command:
Administation> Database > FAN Replacement Update. Or,you may issue the
config database usrpnlrepl CLI command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Backup the database again, with the FAN successfully replaced.
Recovery from NE reset during FAN replacement
Note: If FAN replacement is interrupted by the NE restarting or a Shelf powering
cycle, then the traffic may be lost and a Database Invalid alarm occurs.
If a FAN card is being replaced on a NE and the NE restarts or experiences a power cycle
before the user has a chance to successfully issue the command,
Administration> Database > FAN Replacement Update from the WEBUI
(Release 2.0 and later) menu, or complete the config database usrpnlrepl, traffic
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-21
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
may be lost and the user will see a "database invalid" (DBINVALID) alarm after an NE
reboot. You may use the following procedures to recover the traffic and clear the
DBINVALID alarm:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Re-provision the NE Name. This can be done during the initial connection to the NE with
the WebUI, or using the config general name CLI command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Re-provision the loopback IP address using the config interface loopback ip
CLI command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On a PSS-1, reprovision the FAN LAN1 port IP address, using the
config interface fan lan1 CLI command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-provision the static routing, gateway information, using the
config cn routes static add CLI command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the CLI command, config database restore force, to bring the database
from a remote server to the NE.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement
Maintenance intervals
Air filters on PSS-1 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.
Note: The PSS-1 air filter should be removed when using the unit in Outside Plant
Applications (-40C to +65C). The Outside Plant application requires cabinets to either
have their own filters or be a closed-loop system.
NOTICE
Potential equipment damage
Before installing or removing the filter, check that the protective adhesive film has been
removed.
Fan air filter replacement procedure
CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades.
Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.
Air filters on PSS-1 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Completely loosen the air filter retaining screw.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
4-23
Note: Filter replacement is performed in the same way on all PSS-1 models. (PSS-1
GBEH illustrated.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Grasp the removal tab, pull the old air filter straight out of the PSS-1 unit and dispose of
the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Align a new air filter with the opening in the PSS-1 unit, and slide it straight into the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Completely tighten the air filter retaining screw, but do not overtighten.
User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 5Security administration
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information on security administration procedures for the 1830 PSS
system. The security functions determine NE access, command execution, and
administrative control for the 1830 PSS.
Contents
User accounts and privileges 5-2
Configuring user accounts 5-6
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts 5-10
Login sessions 5-13
System security features 5-15
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure 5-19
Authentication 5-20
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures 5-24
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures 5-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-1
User accounts and privileges
The purpose of security administration is to manage user accounts (logins, passwords,
authorization levels, external links) and to monitor system security so that only valid
users can perform permitted actions and receive authorized information from the system.
The NE provides the ability to create, modify, delete, and view user profiles and
associated security levels. Each level has distinct privileges for accessing and executing
the commands and performing administrative functions on the NE. The description of
each function or command is listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch
(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide and/or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide including the
user levels that are able to access and execute each specific command (see “System
access control” (p. 5-18)).
The system does not provide an “unsecure” user external port. To gain access to an NE
you need a user account with login and password. The user account name, privilege level
and password is created and defined by the Admin user, and is unique for each network
element in the network.
Important! The 1830 PSS is delivered with two default users as part of the factory
software load: one Admin user (with administration privilege) and one Service user
(with service privilege).
The login ID and passwords are:
• For Admin user: admin/admin
• For Service user: service/AlcaLu-1830!
Note: The administration of all security functions is only accessible to Admin and
Service users (i.e. the system will only allow access to these security functions to
users with appropriate security administration privileges). The Service user is not
capable of creating/deleting/managing user profiles. The NE does not allow deletion
of the default users.
Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
The user levels, the privileges assigned to each level, and their intended use are
summarized in Table 5-1, “User privilege levels” (p. 5-3).
Table 5-1 User privilege levels
Level Privileges and use
Observer Observer level restrictions and privileges are as follows:
• An Observer user cannot initialize the database during NE
configuration.
• An Observer user cannot access any Administrative functions.
This includes configuring: database backup/restore, date/time,
IP routes and OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software
upgrade, Syslog, user activity logging.
• An Observer can view and modify user preferences.
• An Observer can change his own password.
• An Observer user can view alarms and conditions, but cannot
access the functions under the Fault and Test/Analysis buttons.
These include: alarm configuration, test LED, and loopback.
• An Observer user cannot select Alarm Cutoff on the alarm
display.
• For Connections:
– An Observer user can view all cross-connects and details,
but cannot create, modify or delete cross-connects.
– An Observer user can view the NE Physical Topology, but
cannot create or delete a connection
– An Observer can view the NE Logical Topology with no
restrictions
• The Observer user cannot create, modify or delete any
equipment-related items or perform any action on the NE that
will change its status. If an Observer user tries to submit such
a request, the WebUI will display a message indicating that the
user does not have permission to perform the function.
• There are no restrictions for the Report menu items.
Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-3
Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)
Level Privileges and use
Provisioner The Provisioner has all the “Observer” privileges plus the
following:
• configure IO cards, ports, interfaces and circuits
• run test procedures on any cards that do not contribute to
system-wide outage (e.g. COLD boot of all packs)
This user cannot provision system-wide security access, (e.g. user
profile, add or delete user account), cannot perform a system
reboot, cannot perform a card-level cold reboot, and cannot
modify OPSA A and B port switching attributes. A Provisioner
user cannot access any Administrative functions. This includes
configuring: database backup/restore, date/time, IP routes and
OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software upgrade, Syslog, user
activity logging.
A Provisioner can view and modify user preferences. A
Provisioner can change his own password.
Admin The Admin user is the administrator for the NE. The Admin has all
the “Provisioner” privileges and can also do the following:
• add users to the NE
• delete users from the NE, except Service user
• edit the security and privilege information of any user, except
Service user
• retrieve security information about users (not password)
• change the password of other users, including other Admin
users, without entering the old password (cannot change
password of Service user)
• logoff a particular user (including a user with administration
privileges and users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and
CLI sessions)
• obtain user info about the users currently logged on to the NE
(including users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and
CLI sessions)
• inhibit and allow all users, including Service user
• set system-wide user security attributes
• retrieve security information about authenticated (logged on)
and unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions
• execute software download and database backup and restore
commands
Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)
Level Privileges and use
Service This is the highest level, and is meant for Alcatel-Lucent
technicians. This user has all the “Admin” privilege (except the
ability to create/delete/manage user profiles), plus the ability to
utilize the debugging and software development tools. The
following applies:
• a maximum of one Service user per NE, created by default, as
part of the SW load. (There is no mechanism to create another
Service user profile or to delete the Service user profile). Only
the Service user can change his/her password
Security administration User accounts and privileges
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-5
Configuring user accounts
Introduction
Login security controls access to the NE(s) by individual users. Client Authentication for
logging in and auditing on each NE requires a user ID (UID) and a complex password.
Security administration enables the system to deny a user access to the NE. The NE
authenticates the user ID against the NE's local security database. Based on this, the NE
either accepts or denies login access to the NE. Access may be denied during one of the
following points in time:
• When the user first attempts to log in and the login attempt is denied.
• During an active session and the user is disconnected by the NE.
After the user logs into an NE with a valid user ID and Password, user functions can be
performed based on the assigned User Access Privilege (UAP).
User identification and user password definition
Userids and passwords can contain the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters in the set [a–z, A–Z]
• Numeric characters in the set [0–9]
• Special characters % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore).
User identifier (UID)
User identity is specified using a UID that is a unique identifier used by an NE for
security management. A UID code is a non-confidential, unique, and auditable
representation of a user such as the login name. The NE supports UIDs that are strings of
5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters where the first character is alphabetic.
The following conditions apply to UIDs:
• Each authorized user (a person, device or a software process having operations related
command inputs access) must have a UID. Each UID must be unique on the NE (i.e.
the system does not support 2 UIDs that are the same).
• At any given instant in time, the NE internally maintains the identity of all UIDs
logged on at that time.
• The NE supports a maximum of 255 unique UIDs.
Password identifier (PID)
A PID is a case sensitive string of 6 to 24 alphabetic [a-z, A-Z], numeric [0-9], or special
characters. A valid password must contain at least 1 alphabetic, 1 numeric, and 1 special
character. The following special characters are accepted as valid: % (percent sign), + (plus
sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore). The first character of the PID can be any
alphabetic, numeric, or valid special character.
Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
The following conditions apply to PIDs:
• The PID cannot be the same as the associated UID, nor can it be the reverse of the
associated UID.
• The NE will not prevent a user from choosing an already existing password (more
than one user can have the same password).
Password administration
The NE supports the ability for a user with security administration privileges to specify
the following user password attributes: the password age (in days); the number of days
that the existing password can continue to be used before a new password becomes
mandatory; the number of times that the existing password can continue to be used before
a new password becomes mandatory; the password obsolescence interval that must elapse
before an obsolete password can be reused.
A user with security administration privileges can provision a system-wide password
aging interval to encourage users to change passwords periodically. The following
applies:
• The default for system-wide password aging interval is 30 days. The allowed range is
from 1 to 999 days.
• The system allows the ability to disable the system-wide password aging interval, by
assigning a value of 0 (zero) days.
A password grace period and number of logins allowed after password expiration can also
be provisioned. The following applies:
• The default for the password grace period is 7 days.
• The default for the number of logins allowed after password expiration is 3.
A password is expired when one of the following events occurs:
• the password is expired and neither a grace period nor number of logins is permitted
after password expiration
• the password is expired and either a grace period or a number of logins is permitted
after password expiration, but the provisioned value(s) is expired (i.e., the user has no
more days to use the expired password, or no more logins allowed with the expired
password).
Users have the ability to change their own password on demand. To change a password,
the user must enter the current password, the new password, and the confirmed new
password (Note: For an Admin user changing another user’s password, only the new
password value needs to be entered). The NE checks the password for proper length and
syntax in accordance with established password requirements. Before updating the NE's
database, the NE ensures that the current password is different from the new password
and that the new password and confirmed new password are the same. An error message
is generated to notify the user if any of the password requirements are not met.
Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-7
Adding a User
A user with appropriate security level privileges (Admin user) can add new users to the
User Security Database and to specify for each user his/her User Access Privilege (UAP).
The UAP specifies the set of commands a user can execute based on the access privilege
of the user and of the command.
Note: A maximum of only 1 Service user is allowed in the NE. Multiple users of the
other user levels are allowed.
The NE provides the ability to specify an initial password pertaining to the new user. The
user is prompted to change the password when one of the following conditions occurs:
• when that user establishes a session for the first time after the initial password is
assigned
• when that user establishes a session for the first time after a user password has been
reset by an administrative action.
The NE denies the session if the user does not comply.
Deleting a user
A user with appropriate security level privileges can delete existing user profiles from the
User Security Database. If the specified user is currently logged on, then the user is also
logged off. Users with security administration privileges can delete any existing user
profile except default users' profiles.
Note: A user with administration or service privileges cannot delete his/her own user
profile. The Admin user cannot delete the Service user, and the Service user cannot
delete himself.
Retrieving and editing user privileges
The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided
to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile
database entry for another user.
• Only users with administrator privileges can edit the User Security Level User
attributes that exist for each user's profile. The security level user attributes are: user
privilege level, link timeout, user provided name, and user-id status. It is not possible
to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.
• Any change to the privilege(s) granted to a user do not apply to the user if the user is
currently logged in. Any such change will take effect after the next login.
Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile
entries.
• Only those parameter values that are actually applied for the specified UID are
reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but
still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.
Enabling/disabling a user
A user with appropriate security level privileges can disable existing user profiles in the
User Security Database. If the specified user is logged on, then the user is also logged off.
A user cannot disable himself/herself.
A user with appropriate security level privileges can enable existing and previously
disabled user profiles in the User Security Database for a specified user(s).
Note: The Admin user can disable and enable all users including the Service user.
Security administration Configuring user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-9
Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
Before you begin
The following procedures are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see Procedure 4-1: “Connect to Network Element
through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI” (p. 4-2)).
View or modify user details
Note: Appropriate privilege level is required to configure user accounts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the desired user and click Details.
Result: User details are displayed. You can change privilege level or password, or
enable or disable the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Modify available fields (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.
Create a user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: Create User screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter appropriate information (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.
Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete a user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the desired user and click Delete.
Change password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Change Password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the old password and the new password, and confirm the new password. Then click
Apply.
View / terminate sessions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Sessions.
Result: All active sessions are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To terminate a session, select the desired session and click Terminate.
View SNMP v3 users
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > SNMP v3 Users.
Result: All current SNMP v3 users are displayed.
Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-11
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create SNMP v3 user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > SNMP v3 Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To create an SNMP v3 user, click Create.
Result: The Create SNMP v3 User window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter User ID, Password, and Access Privilege information. and click Apply.
Modify SNMP v3 user
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > SNMP v3 Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify an SNMP v3 user, select the user and click Modify.
Result: The Modify SNMP v3 User window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the desired parameters and click Apply.
View / modify system security attributes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > System.
Result: The System Security Administration window with current settings is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify existing value(s), enter desired value(s) and click Apply.
Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Login sessions
Overview
There is no limit to the number of simultaneous active sessions per user ID. One user ID
can log into the NE multiple times (via WebUI, TL1, CLI, and SNMP), the maximum of
which is restricted by the number of sessions supported by the NE. The NE notifies the
security administrator when a user logs into the NE indicating the UID and the
established User Session Number.
The ability to authenticate a session (i.e., activate a user session) is established with the
NE by logging in an existing user through a UID and a PID. The NE will deny the
activation of a user session if authentication for the user cannot be established (e.g. the
specified password does not match the user's password on the NE, the user profile does
not exist on the NE, etc.).
The NE allows a user to cancel a current session which was previously authenticated by a
login request by providing a logoff function for the current session.
The following applies to canceling a user session:
• Only users with appropriate administration privileges are able to logoff other users.
Otherwise users can only logoff themselves.
• Users with administration privileges and also the Service user can logoff other users
with administration privileges.
• A command request to cancel a session will terminate a single active user session on
the addressed NE. In addition, any supporting connection that is no longer supporting
other sessions or connections, is also terminated.
Session timeout
The NE supports auto log out and auto disconnect of user sessions based upon user link
inactivity (i.e. an idle user). Inactivity is defined as lack of user input. The inactivity
interval (period which triggers log out) is provisionable on a system basis. The longest
such interval allowed for an idle user is 999 minutes, with a minimum of 1 minute and a
default of 60 minutes. The system allows the ability to disable the User Session Link
Timer attribute, on a system basis, by assigning the zero value. A value of 0 implies no
idle timeout, (i.e. the user can remain idle forever).
When the session timer expires, the NE logs out and disconnects a user's session to the
NE. The session timer is reset/restarted by successful user login and user session link
communication input activity after the login occurs.
Each properly logged-in session will either be logged out by the user or by system
inactivity or by connection interruption. When a session is terminated (e.g., normal
logoff, power failure, a break in the physical or logical connection), the NE ensures that
the port drops immediately and terminates the user processes running at the time of
Security administration Login sessions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-13
logoff. When the next user attempts to log on to that physical or logical port, the user is
required to go through the entire login procedure including identification and
authentication.
The admin user may configure unique per user session timeout, based on the UID profile.
If provisioned, the timeout value may take on any value up to the system maximum. If
provisioned, the user-defined session timeout takes precedence over the system-wide
session timeout value provisioned.
Security administration Login sessions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
System security features
Encrypted and normal mode
The system supports the ability to set the NE to function in an encrypted or normal mode.
Encrypted or normal mode should be set during initial commissioning. There is no default
mode. Only the administrative user can invoke the security mode on the NE. Changing
the mode from encrypted to normal, or vice versa, causes a warm reboot of the active
Main EC. All current user sessions will be logged off as a result.
The NE does not allow the encrypted mode setting if there is no SSH key initialized on
the system. Encrypted mode can only be turned on after the NE has already generated an
SSH key. The NE applies the following guidelines when setting the mode to either
encrypted or normal. These settings apply to the OAMP port only.
In encrypted mode:
• SSH is enabled
• telnet is disabled to ports 23, 3082, 3083
• telnet is enabled to port 22 to support SSH
• SNMP ports (161, 162) are allowed to be enabled
• port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other circuit
packs on the local NE
• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled
• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests to the
NE are disabled
• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
In normal mode:
• SSH is enabled (SSH can be used in both modes)
• telnet is enabled to all ports TL1 (3082, 3083) and CLI (22, 23) ports
• SNMP ports (161, 163) are allowed to be enabled
• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled
• HTTP (Web interface available) is enabled for remote management
• The port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other
circuit packs on the local NE
• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c requests are allowed by the NE
• SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests are not allowed by the NE
• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
• CLI over the craft serial port is not encrypted
Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-15
The NE supports the enabling and disabling of the following external ports: OAMP, VoIP,
E1-LAN, E2-LAN, ES1 and ES2 for extension shelves. Only an administrative user has
the ability to enable/disable these interfaces. The serial/console port cannot be disabled.
Note: The two external LAN ports, E1 and E2, connect to externally managed
devices, like RAMAN or EDFA power booster amplifiers. In the current release, one
User Panel is supported on the Master Shelf of an NE. This provides a maximum of 2
LAN ports for external RAMAN or Booster devices per NE.
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP file transfer protocols are supported for both encrypted and normal
mode. Database backup/restore, and PM upload/transfer can use either TFTP or SFTP.
Software download can use either FTP or SFTP.
SFTP (secure FTP) is a program that uses SSH to transfer files. Unlike standard FTP, it
encrypts both commands and data, preventing passwords and sensitive information from
being transmitted in the clear over the network. It is functionally similar to FTP, but
because it uses a different protocol, standard FTP client can't be used to talk to an SFTP
server, nor an FTP server can be connected with a client that supports only SFTP.
The following applies:
• FTP and SFTP passwords are stored in the database using AES encryption.
• No user interface displays the password for the FTP and SFTP server.
• SFTP or TFTP are used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or in normal
mode.
Secure Shell (SSH)
Secure Shell (SSH) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure
channel between two network devices. SSH is designed as a replacement for telnet and
other unsecure remote shells which send information (notably passwords) in plaintext,
leaving them open to interception. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality
and integrity of data over an unsecure network, such as Internet. SSH allows a trusted
path of communication between two ends (e.g., NE and EMS) using encryption of the
data stream.
The following applies:
• The 1830 NE supports SSHv2. This applies to both 1830 PSS-32 and the 1830 PSS-1
(Edge Device).
• The NE supports the generation of the SSH crypto Key. This crypto key needs to be
generated before the NE is set to encrypted mode. The NE allows the generation of
the crypto key only if the NE mode is normal. If the NE mode is encrypted, the crypto
key generation is denied.
Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
• SSH Keys cannot be zeroized in encrypted mode.
• The NE supports AES encryption. SSH key must be encrypted with AES before
storing in the disk.
Security event log
For security purposes, the system generates a security log to provide an audit trail record
that supports after-the-fact investigation of specific activities (e.g., logins, modification of
critical system resources). The security log provides a means for the Security
Administrator to investigate, audit, detect, and analyze security events in order that proper
remedial actions can be taken. Security logs are protected from unauthorized access and
no modification by any user or process, even debug tools, is allowed.
The system provides the ability to a user with sufficient security level privileges to
retrieve security event log reports that were generated by the system for a given UserID
and between a specified From Date and Time and To Date and Time.
The following applies to the security log:
• The security log has a circular (or equivalent) recording mechanism (i.e., oldest
record overwritten by newest), and an appropriate administrator has the capability to
retrieve, print, copy, and upload the security log for long-term storage.
• When the security log has reached 90% of its maximum size, the NE sends an
appropriate event to the security administrator.
• The security event log file is protected from tampering by any user defined in the user
security database and cannot be deleted by any user defined in the user security
database.
• The security event log file is stored in non-volatile memory and survives system
restarts/resets.
• The security event log file does not survive software generic upgrades and power
reset.
Security log contents
Each NE is able to log the following classes of information in the security log:
• any action that changes the security attributes and services
• any action that changes access controls
• any action that changes configuration parameters of the device
• each login attempt and its result
• each logout or session termination (whether remote or console, whether requested or
due to inactivity timeout)
Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-17
A security log entry contains the following information:
• the identification, address and security level of the user that initiated the action that is
being logged
• the actual attempted action that is being logged (the echo of the command/response
message)
• an indication of the success or failure of the activity (command completion code)
• the date and the time the action (i.e. the command or the message) occurred
Note: The security event log file does not record actual or attempted passwords that
are entered in as passwords.
System access control
System access control prevents an otherwise authenticated (valid) user from unauthorized
access. Not all system resources are available to every user, and restricting resource
availability is extremely important to securing a safe and trusted network. System access
control allows only authorized users access to the NE. Access control level is associated
with each user and is maintained through the User Security Level attribute.
To execute any command, a user needs a User Security Level (User Access Privilege)
including the Command Security Level (Command Access Privilege) assigned to the
command being executed. If the user is denied the privilege of executing a command due
to an insufficient User Security Level, the system indicates to the user that the command
request is invalid due to insufficient privileges.
All physical ports of the NE exercise system access control. This includes direct access
serial and LAN ports (CIT, external OAMP network access, etc.) and access via an
Embedded Communications Channel (ECC) as in the case of GCC between 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16 and the 1830 PSS-1 (Edge Device).
Any failed login attempt immediately reports to the user that the login process has failed
or is invalid. Information such as “invalid user ID” or “invalid password” is not reported.
The NE performs the entire user authentication procedure even if the UID that is entered
is not valid. After a failed login attempt, the system delays for 2 seconds prior to
presenting the next login prompt. This applies to human interaction interfaces (e.g. CLI,
TL1, WebUI).
After the maximum number of consecutive invalid login attempts for a session has been
reached, the system records in the security log the IP address of the source along with the
UID and an intrusion transient condition is reported.
Security administration System security features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure
View security log
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Reports > Logs > Security.
Result: The Security Log is displayed.
Security administration Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-19
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication
Overview
Authentication is the act of verifying a claimed identity, providing a basis for setting up
private communications with full data integrity and logging management activity. The
system supports the following different methods of authentication.
• RADIUS authentication
• Local NE Authentication
• SNMP
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's privilege level. The RADIUS
client works with Steel-Belted RADIUS, WinRADIUS, and FreeRadius servers. The NE
supports provisioning of up to 2 RADIUS Servers. The administrative privilege user can
add/delete the specific RADIUS server.
The following applies:
• The administrative privilege user can Enable/Disable the RADIUS servers without
deleting their configuration.
• When two servers are configured and enabled, the NE queries the second RADIUS
server (RAD2) only if the first server (RAD1) does not respond after the appropriate
timeout and retries.
• Web users are authenticated from the local stored database regardless of whether
RADIUS is enabled.
• SNMP users are not authenticated by RADIUS.
• RADIUS functionality can be used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or
normal mode.
• A login by the Service user is never authenticated using RADIUS for any user
interfaces (CLI or WebUI). The authentication for the Service user is always local.
Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
RADIUS attributes
The NE supports configuring the following general RADIUS attributes:
• Timeout: This is the timeout (in seconds) for the NE to wait for a response from the
RADIUS server. A failure is declared after the timeout is elapsed. The supported value
range for timeout is 1 to 1000. The default value is 5.
• Retries: This is the number of attempts that the NE will try to contact the specified
RADIUS server that has failed to respond during the previous request(s). If there is no
response from the server after the specified tries, then the NE will try to contact the
second RADIUS server if one is provisioned. The supported value range for retries is
1 to 100. The default value is 3.
The NE supports the following RADIUS server attributes. The RADIUS attributes can be
configured, edited, deleted, and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative
privilege. The "sharedSecret" parameter cannot be retrieved.
• ServerNum: This is the AID for the RADIUS server. The acceptable values are RAD1
and RAD2.
• IPAddr: This is the IP address of the specified RADIUS server.
• Port: This is the authentication port of the RADIUS server. The valid value is from 1
to 65000. The default port value is 1812.
• sharedSecret: This is the shared secret key between the NE and the target RADIUS
server. This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters.
• Status: This is RADIUS server status. The valid values are the following
– Enabled - The RADIUS server is online. This is the default value.
– Disabled - The RADIUS server is offline.
The NE supports configuring the following authentication ordering behavior options that
can be configured and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative privilege.
• LOCAL: Authentication is based on the local NE's security database. This is the
default.
• RADIUS: Authentication is based on the RADIUS server's database.
• RADIUS-THEN-LOCAL: The authentication is attempted first using the RADIUS
server's database. If the RADIUS server is not reachable then authentication is based
on local NE's security database.
Note: If the RADIUS server is reachable and the user profile does not exist in
RADIUS server's database, then the authentication fails and the user is denied access.
Local NE authentication
Local NE Authentication is accomplished via the UID and PID pair created and stored on
the local NE.
Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-21
Note: The access to the database (for authentication) of the NE where user profiles
are stored, is allowed only on a local connection. This is for the Service user to access
locally via connection to RS232 or local CIT port.
SNMP authentication
The local NE can authenticate and authorize users based on SNMP. SNMP provides for
both security versions and security levels. A security version is an authentication strategy
that is set up for a user and the group in which the user resides. A security level is the
permitted level of security within a security version. A combination of a security version
and a security level will determine which security mechanism is employed when handling
an SNMP packet. Three security versions are available: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3.
The following applies to SNMP:
• The NE supports separate DB records for SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3 users are different
from the other users. SNMPv3 users can be provisioned via WebUI.
• The system supports creation of a default SNMP user at initial startup with a known
password. This known password permits 1354RM-PhM to perform auto-discovery of
NEs. The default SNMP user cannot be deleted. It can only be disabled.
• The NE supports changing SNMPv3 users' authentication (auth) and privacy (priv)
passwords.
• The system supports enabling and disabling SNMP users.
• The NE supports sending Authentication Failure traps and supports enabling and
disabling the sending of Authentication Failure Traps.
• The system allows a new SNMP user to be created from an administrator account.
• Even if RADIUS authentication is enabled on the system, login access to the NE via
SNMP is always based on the UID and PID pair resident on the NE.
SNMP trap destinations
The system supports editing and retrieval of SNMP trap destinations. Trap destinations
are SNMP managers provisioned to listen to traps coming from the NE. These SNMP
managers may or may not also be actively managing the NE.
The following SNMP trap server attributes are supported:
• SNMPTrapID - this is the ID of the SNMP trap server. The system supports up to 5
remote trap servers. This value is required to discern which trap server the user is
addressing. Possible values are 1 thru 5.
• IPAddr - this is the IP address of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP address of the
server that serves as the trap destination.
• String - this is the community string sent to the SNMP trap server. It is an ascii string
from 1 to 32 characters.
Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
• IPaddress Port - this is the (IP address) port of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP
address port of the server that serves as the trap destination.
• Timeout - Specifies the time (round trip), in hundreths of a second, after which the
connection times out if no reply is received. Following a timeout, a retry is attempted,
up to the number of retries specified by the retry variable.
• Retry Count - Specifies an integer value for the number of times the network element
will attempt to retry the connection in the event of a timeout.
• SNMP version - the SNMP version to use when formatting the trap. Valid versions are
v1, v2c, and v3.
• NMS Station Group ID - Specifies an integer value that uniquely identifies the NMS
workstation serving as the trap destination. (Use 0 for all third party SNMP trap
servers).
Note: Traps are sent in SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 format, depending on the security level
of the NE. If the NE is encrypted, then all traps are encrypted, so the traps will be in
v3 format. All SNMPv3 traps are sent with the SNMPv3 default user. In normal
mode, the version can be v2 or v3.
SNMP community strings
The system supports creation, editing, deletion, and retrieval of SNMP community
strings. Community strings are necessary for authentication (e.g. if the manager comes
into the NE via SNMPv2). Provisioning of these tasks is accomplished via CLI, WebUI,
and SNMP.
Note: If the NE is in encrypted mode, the user can still configure these community
strings, but the remote SNMP manager will connect via SNMPv3.
The following SNMP community attributes are supported:
• SNMPComID – this is the ID of the SNMP community. The system supports up to 5
pre-configured communities, one for each of the user privilege classes. Possible
values are: admin, provisioner, observer, nms, and 3rdpnms. This parameter requires a
value.
• String – this is the community string sent from the SNMP manager to the NE. It is an
ascii string from 1 to 32 characters. Based on the string and the privilege level
inherited from the SNMPComID, the NE will either process or deny the SNMP
request. The string must be unique (there cannot be duplicate strings) and the string
cannot start or end with a blank space.
The SNMP string is checked every time an SNMP request is processed by the NE. If
there is a match, then the NE will further check the privilege level of that string to
ensure that the request can be granted given the command privilege level. If the string
does not match any string defined in the NE, the request fails and the NE returns a
failure message. If the privilege level is inadequate for the request being asked, then
the NE returns a failure message, otherwise, the request is processed.
Security administration Authentication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-23
Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures
Create RADIUS server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Servers
Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: The Create RADIUS Server screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter parameters and click Apply.
Delete RADIUS server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Servers
Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the RADIUS server and click Delete.
View RADIUS server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Servers
Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the RADIUS server and click Details.
Result: The RADIUS server details are displayed.
Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision RADIUS properties
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Properties
Result: The RADIUS Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter parameters and click Apply.
Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-25
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
Create trap destinations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Trap Destinations
Result: The SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Create.
Result: The Create SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter parameters and click Apply.
Delete trap destinations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Trap Destinations
Result: The SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Trap Destination and click Delete.
View trap destinations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Trap Destinations
Result: The SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the trap destination and click Details.
Result: The Trap Destination details are displayed.
Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
View / modify community strings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Community Strings
Result: The SNMP Community Strings are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To modify Community Strings, enter appropriate values in the respective fields and click
Apply.
Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
5-27
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6 6Alarm List
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the alarm list and alarm descriptions for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device. Procedures for clearing these alarms are detailed in Chapter 7, “Alarm Clearing
Procedures”.
The following information is provided for each condition:
• a description of the condition that includes the possible root cause
• the condition severity
• whether or not the condition is service-affecting
• the cards or systems to which the condition applies
Contents
BDI 6-4
BDIODU 6-5
CARDINIT 6-6
CONTCOM 6-7
DATAFLT 6-8
DBFL 6-9
DBFT 6-10
DBINVALID 6-11
DEG 6-12
EQPT 6-13
ETR-MISMATCH (card) 6-14
FACTERM-DEV 6-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-1
FELANLOS 6-16
FELANLSS 6-17
FELOS 6-18
FEPORTMISMATCH 6-19
FRCDWKSWBK 6-20
FRCDWKSWPR 6-21
INTTEMP [over] 6-22
INTTEMP [under] 6-23
LANLOS 6-24
LANLSS 6-25
LCK 6-26
LFD 6-27
LINKDOWN 6-28
LOCKOUTOFPR 6-29
LOF 6-30
LOFEGR 6-32
LOM 6-33
LOS 6-34
LOS-P 6-35
LPBKLINE 6-36
LPBKTERM 6-37
MAN 6-38
MANWKSWBK 6-40
MANWKSWPR 6-41
MISMATCH 6-42
NET 6-43
OCI 6-44
PLM 6-45
PRCDRERR-TOPO 6-46
PWR 6-47
REPLUNITMISS 6-48
REPLUNITMISSMOD 6-49
SSF 6-50
Alarm List Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
SSFODU 6-51
SWFTDWN 6-52
SWUPGFAIL 6-53
TIM 6-54
TIMODU 6-55
TRMT 6-56
UNKNOWN 6-57
UPM 6-59
USALS 6-60
VOLTAGE[high] 6-61
VOLTAGE[low] 6-62
WKSWPR 6-63
Alarm List Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-3
BDI
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Level Not reported
AID PSS1MD4-1-8-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Probable Cause • An improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber on the trail
between the local OTUk port
transmitter and the far end receive
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the
OCh trail
• The received power may not be
within the acceptable range on the
Far end input
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1
Description Backward Defect Indication - OTU
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “BDI” (p. 7-4)
Alarm List BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
BDIODU
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Level Not reported
AID PSS1MD4-1-8-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Probable Cause • An improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber on the trail
between the local OTUk port
transmitter and the far end receive
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the
OCh trail
• The received power may not be
within the acceptable range on the
Far end input
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Backward Defect Indication - ODU
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “BDIODU” (p. 7-5)
Alarm List BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-5
CARDINIT
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-8, PSS1P21-1-7
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card initializing
Likely cause The card is in the process of
initializing.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “CARDINIT” (p. 7-6)
Alarm List CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
CONTCOM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},
PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card failure - communication
Likely cause See listing in “CONTCOM” (p. 7-7)
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “CONTCOM” (p. 7-7)
Alarm List CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-7
DATAFLT
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card provisioning failure
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “DATAFLT” (p. 7-9)
Alarm List DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
DBFL
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID System
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description DB Failure Local - copy creation of
processing failure
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “DBFL” (p. 7-11)
Alarm List DBFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-9
DBFT
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID System
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description DB Failure Transport - file transport
failure
Likely cause File transfer of database to RFS was
unsuccessful
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “DBFT” (p. 7-12)
Alarm List DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
DBINVALID
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID System
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Database invalid
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “DBINVALID” (p. 7-13)
Alarm List DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-11
DEG
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Signal Degrade - ODU
Likely cause See “DEG” (p. 7-15) for possible
causes.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “DEG” (p. 7-15).
Alarm List DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
EQPT
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3},
PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card-Failure Device
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “EQPT” (p. 7-17)
Alarm List EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-13
ETR-MISMATCH (card)
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6,
EC-1-1, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Extended temperature range violation:
non-ETR card.
Likely cause A non-ETR card is present in a
chassis that is provisioned for ETR
operation.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “ETR-MISMATCH
(card)” (p. 7-19)
Alarm List ETR-MISMATCH (card)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
FACTERM-DEV
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description SFP SEEP failure
Likely cause System cannot communicate with
SFP
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FACTERM-DEV”
(p. 7-21)
Alarm List FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-15
FELANLOS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not Alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE
Description Far End Loss of Signal
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FELANLOS” (p. 7-23)
Alarm List FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
FELANLSS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not Alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200
Description Far End Loss of Synchronization.
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FELANLSS” (p. 7-24)
Alarm List FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-17
FELOS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not Alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type CBRAR
Description Far End Loss of Signal
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FELOS” (p. 7-25)
Alarm List FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
FEPORTMISMATCH
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, OC3, OC12,
OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,
CBRAR
Description Far End Port Mapping Mismatch
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FEPORTMISMATCH”
(p. 7-26)
Alarm List FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-19
FRCDWKSWBK
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NA
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; OC3; OC12;
OC48; STM1; STM4; STM16;
CBRAR
Description Forced switch to working
Likely cause A manual forced switch to “working”
has occurred.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWBK”
(p. 7-27).
Alarm List FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
FRCDWKSWPR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NA
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; OC3; OC12;
OC48; STM1; STM4;STM16;
CBRAR
Description Forced switch to protection
Likely cause A manual forced switch to
“protection” has occurred.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWPR”
(p. 7-28).
Alarm List FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-21
INTTEMP [over]
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition was
detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card over temperature
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “INTEMP [over]” (p. 7-29)
Alarm List INTTEMP [over]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
INTTEMP [under]
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card under temperature
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “INTEMP [under]”
(p. 7-31)
Alarm List INTTEMP [under]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-23
LANLOS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AIDPSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; FC400;
CBRAR
Description LAN Loss of Signal
Likely cause • Damaged, cut or dirty fiber
connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be
within the acceptable range on
local port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter
inside pluggable module
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LANLOS” (p. 7-32)
Alarm List LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LANLSS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; Fc400
Description Loss of Synchronization
Likely cause • dirty fiber
• wrong signal from upstream
equipment
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LANLSS” (p. 7-33)
Alarm List LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-25
LCK
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Locked - ODU
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LCK” (p. 7-34).
Alarm List LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LFD
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE
Description GFP Loss of Frame Delineation
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LFD” (p. 7-35).
Alarm List LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-27
LINKDOWN
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID FAN-1-6-CIT
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type PLK
Description Link Down
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LINKDOWN” (p. 7-36)
Alarm List LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LOCKOUTOFPR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; OC3; OC12;
OC48; STM1; STM4; STM16;
CBRAR
Description Lockout of protection
Likely cause A user-initiated lockout switch request
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFPR”
(p. 7-39).
Alarm List LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-29
LOF
Description (line ports)
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1, OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1,
STM4, STM16
Description Loss of Frame
Likely cause • an improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber
• the received power may not be
within the acceptable range
• the data rate may be inconsistent
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-41)
Description (client ports)
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OC3; OC12; OC48; STM1; STM4;
STM16
Description Loss of Frame
Alarm List LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Likely cause • an improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber
• the received power may not be
within the acceptable range
• the data rate may be inconsistent
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-41)
Alarm List LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-31
LOFEGR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1, STM4,
STM16
Description Loss of Frame Egress
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOFEGR” (p. 7-45).
Alarm List LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LOM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MJ
AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1
Description Loss of Multiframe - OTU
Likely cause • Damaged or dirty fiber connected
to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be
within the acceptable range on
OT port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter
inside pluggable module on the
OT
• Problem at the upstream OT
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOM” (p. 7-46).
Alarm List LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-33
LOS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID SFC-1-{4, 5}-OMD
PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OTS, OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1,
STM4, STM16
Description Loss of Signal
Likely cause • An improperly connected,
damaged, or dirty fiber
• The received power may not be
within the acceptable range
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOS” (p. 7-48)
Alarm List LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LOS-P
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1
Description Loss of Signal - OTU
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LOS-P” (p. 7-54)
Alarm List LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-35
LPBKLINE
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NA
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Facility loop active
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LPBKLINE” (p. 7-56)
Alarm List LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LPBKTERM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NA
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Terminal loop active
Likely cause A terminal loopback is active
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “LPBKTERM” (p. 7-57)
Alarm List LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-37
MAN
Description (card)
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels N/A
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, SFC-1-{4, 5}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service N/A
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Manually caused abnormal condition
- card in maintenance
Likely cause Card purposefully provisioned to
maintenance state
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - card in
maintenance)” (p. 7-58)
Description (port)
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels N/A
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4},
SFC-1-{4, 5}-{OMD}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service N/A
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Manually caused abnormal condition
- port in maintenance
Alarm List MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Likely cause Port purposefully provisioned to
maintenance state
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused
abnormal condition - port in
maintenance)” (p. 7-59)
Alarm List MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-39
MANWKSWBK
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, OC3, OC12,
OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,
CBRAR
Description Manual switch to working
Likely cause A manual switch to the working
facility is active
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWBK”
(p. 7-60).
Alarm List MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
MANWKSWPR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels Not alarmed
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, OC3, OC12,
OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,
CBRAR
Description Manual switch to protection
Likely cause A manual switch to a protection
facility is active
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “MANWKSWPR”
(p. 7-61).
Alarm List MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-41
MISMATCH
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description SFP mismatch
Likely cause SFP plugged in does not match
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “MISMATCH” (p. 7-62)
Alarm List MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
NET
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4},
FAN-1-6-LAN1
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type PLK
Description Link down
Likely cause Ethernet link connectivity lost
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “NET” (p. 7-64).
Alarm List NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-43
OCI
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Open Connection Indication - ODU
Likely cause Network operator in external OTN
has deleted or not yet provisioned a
connection on OTN switched network
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “OCI” (p. 7-65).
Alarm List OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-44 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
PLM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU
Likely cause Incoming 10G LAN signal not
provisioned correctly
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “PLM” (p. 7-66)
Alarm List PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-45
PRCDRERR-TOPO
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID System
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Invalid topology
Likely cause A software upgrade has occurred and
cross connects from the previous
software release do not adhere to the
rules of the new release.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR-TOPO”
(p. 7-67)
Alarm List PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
PWR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PF-1-{2,3}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Battery off or power filter off
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “PWR” (p. 7-69)
Alarm List PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-47
REPLUNITMISS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-{4,5}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card missing
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “REPLUNTMISS”
(p. 7-71)
Alarm List REPLUNITMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-48 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
REPLUNITMISSMOD
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description SFP or XFP missing
Likely cause The provisioned slot does not have
SFP inserted, or an in-service SFP has
been removed.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISSMOD”
(p. 7-73)
Alarm List REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-49
SSF
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1
Description Server Signal Failure - OTU
Likely cause • An improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber on the trail
between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the
OCh trail
• The received power may not be
within the acceptable range on the
Far end input
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “SSF” (p. 7-75).
Alarm List SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-50 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
SSFODU
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Server Signal Failure - ODU
Likely cause • An improperly connected,
damaged or dirty fiber on the trail
between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the
OCh trail
• The received power may not be
within the acceptable range on the
Far end input
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “SSFODU” (p. 7-77).
Alarm List SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-51
SWFTDWN
Description
Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the NE. This alarm is active
if the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to
commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Software Upgrade in Progress
Likely cause Download of upgrade software in
progress
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “SWFTDWN” (p. 7-79)
Alarm List SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-52 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
SWUPGFAIL
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-7
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type COM
Description Software Upgrade Failed
Likely cause NE or specific card fails to upgrade to
designated software load
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL” (p. 7-80)
Alarm List SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-53
TIM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels MN
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type OTU1
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU
Likely cause • There is an error in the
configuration of the trace at the
transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of
compatible SOET sources (TIM
or TTI Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated
(TIM or TTI Mismatch)
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “TIM” (p. 7-85).
Alarm List TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-54 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
TIMODU
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type ODU1
Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU
Likely cause • Incoming optical channel trail
trace message doesn't match the
expected optical channel trail
trace message
• Mis-fibering
• Improper provisioning
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “TIMODU” (p. 7-88).
Alarm List TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-55
TRMT
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description SFP transmit failure
Likely cause SFP fault at transmit port, or SFP
hardware failure
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “TRMT” (p. 7-90)
Alarm List TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-56 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN (card)
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},
PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Card unknown
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN” (p. 7-92)
Unknown SFP
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR (MN if protected or inactive)
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA (NSA if protected or inactive)
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description SFP unknown
Likely cause • SFP is of type not recognized
• Damaged SFP
• Damage to card holding SFP
Visible Indication
Alarm List UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-57
Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN” (p. 7-92)
Alarm List UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-58 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
UPM
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE
Description GFP User Payload Mismatch
Likely cause
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “UPM” (p. 7-95).
Alarm List UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-59
USALS
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels NA
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, OC3,
OC12, OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,
CBRAR
Description Auto laser off (client port) due to
upstream condition
Likely cause • Network port has optical LOS
• Corresponding client port at far
end of this service has fault
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “USALS” (p. 7-96).
Alarm List USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-60 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
VOLTAGE[high]
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service SA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description High Input Voltage Defect
Likely cause The voltage level of the external DC
supply is too high.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[high]”
(p. 7-98).
Alarm List VOLTAGE[high]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-61
VOLTAGE[low]
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels CR
AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service NSA
Alarm Entity Type EQPT
Description Low Input Voltage Defect
Likely cause The voltage level of the external DC
supply is too low or the breaker
switch has been turned off.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[low]”
(p. 7-99).
Alarm List VOLTAGE[low]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-62 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
WKSWPR
Description
Alarm Data Value/Meaning
Severity Levels TC
AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
Date Month/day/year that the condition
was detected
Time Hour:minute:second that the condition
was detected
Effect on Service N/A
Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, OC3, OC12,
OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,
CBRAR
Description Automatic switch to protection
Likely cause A protection switch has occurred and
reversion is enabled.
Visible Indication
Action Proceed to “WKSWPR” (p. 7-100).
Alarm List WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
6-63
Alarm List WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-64 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7 7Alarm Clearing Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains the trouble-clearing procedures required to clear the conditions for
the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device
Before you begin
Disconnecting cables and/or replacing circuit packs may disrupt service.
Before taking action, determine the extent of service disruption caused by disconnecting
cables or replacing a circuit pack. Then, perform the action(s) deemed appropriate in
light of the traffic being carried and the nature of the failure.
Many trouble-clearing procedures require actions that are service affecting. These actions
are indicated by a caution message indicating the extent of the service disruption as
shown above.
Contents
BDI 7-4
BDIODU 7-5
CARDINIT 7-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-1
CONTCOM 7-7
DATAFLT 7-9
DBFL 7-11
DBFT 7-12
DBINVALID 7-13
DEG 7-15
EQPT 7-17
ETR-MISMATCH (card) 7-19
FACTERM-DEV 7-21
FELANLOS 7-23
FELANLSS 7-24
FELOS 7-25
FEPORTMISMATCH 7-26
FRCDWKSWBK 7-27
FRCDWKSWPR 7-28
INTEMP [over] 7-29
INTEMP [under] 7-31
LANLOS 7-32
LANLSS 7-33
LCK 7-34
LFD 7-35
LINKDOWN 7-36
LOCKOUTOFPR 7-39
LOF 7-41
LOFEGR 7-45
LOM 7-46
LOS 7-48
LOS-P 7-54
LPBKLINE 7-56
LPBKTERM 7-57
MAN 7-58
MANWKSWBK 7-60
MANWKSWPR 7-61
Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
MISMATCH 7-62
NET 7-64
OCI 7-65
PLM 7-66
PRCDRERR-TOPO 7-67
PWR 7-69
REPLUNTMISS 7-71
REPLUNITMISSMOD 7-73
SSF 7-75
SSFODU 7-77
SWFTDWN 7-79
SWUPGFAIL 7-80
TIM 7-85
TIMODU 7-88
TRMT 7-90
UNKNOWN 7-92
UPM 7-95
USALS 7-96
VOLTAGE[high] 7-98
VOLTAGE[low] 7-99
WKSWPR 7-100
Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-3
BDI
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF or LOM would contribute to SSF)
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk
port transmitter and the far end receiver
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity Not reported
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1), request corrective action by client operators.
Alarm Clearing Procedures BDI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
BDIODU
Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server
Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI or
ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk
port transmitter and the far end receiver
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity Not reported
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected
on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1), request corrective action by client operators.
Alarm Clearing Procedures BDIODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-5
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CARDINIT
CARDINIT (Card Initializing)
The card is in the process of initializing:
Severity CR
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm.
No corrective action is required.
Alarm Clearing Procedures CARDINIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
CONTCOM
CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)
The NE has detected the presence of a card, but is unable to establish internal
communications with it. Possible causes for this alarm are:
• a faulty card
• a problem with the backplane
• a cable has been cut or disconnected from one end or the other
• the sub-tended shelf has been turned off
• the alarm panel on the sub-tended shelf has been extracted
• Fan, PPS: card not communicating with the controller hardware
• loss of power to 1/2 the shelf
This condition may be accompanied by system timing-related or card sanity conditions.
Severity Critical (Minor if inactive protected card)
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3},
SFC-1-{4,5}
Note: If this alarm is present on a card when the master shelf controller hardware
undergoes a reset or a switch of activity, this alarm reappears as a Card missing alarm.
Refer to “REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)” .
The NE has detected the presence of a card, but the card does not exhibit minimal
functionality. This alarm is raised when the integrated control hardware has detected an
indication on the backplane of card failure.
This alarm may be raised for the following reasons:
• Bent or broken pins on the backplane slot or on the card’s backplane connector
Severity Not reported
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-7
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it doesn’t, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the alarmed card completely from the shelf and examine the connector on the
backplane where the card was inserted to make sure there are no bent or broken pins.
Reinsert the card into its original slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Replace the card with a new one of the same type in the same slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform either a warm reset or a cold reset of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact your service representative.
Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DATAFLT
DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)
The Card Provisioning Failure may be raised if a card rejects the provisioning parameters
given to it by the integrated control hardware upon a reset or due to a user provisioning
action. This may indicate a discrepancy on the database of the control hardware or may
indicate a problem with the software.
The card, against which the DATAFLT condition is raised, may not be able to provide
services since some or all of the provisioning parameters were rejected.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5), EC-1-1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine if there is a software mismatch on the NE. If so, resolve the software issue
first. The NE should be running with a committed software load.
CLI show software upgrade status alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAFLT condition raised against it:
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-9
Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFL
DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)
A download of a database backup from the remote file server (part of the database restore
process) will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main Equipment
Controller’s flash memory, and a database failure condition-local will be raised (DBFL).
If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be transported
to the RFS), a database failure condition-local is set.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Contact your next level of support.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-11
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBFT
DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)
If the file transfer of the database to the remote file server does not succeed, a database
failure condition-transport is set.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retry the database backup.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Contact your next level of support.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DBINVALID
DBINVALID (Database invalid)
The DBINVALID condition may be raised as a result of the following:
• The serial number in the database does not match that of the NE because the PSS-1
unit was replaced.
• A downgrade of NE software has occurred.
• The database audit failed indicating some type of corruption of the database.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If this is a result of a downgrade, then follow the appropriate procedure in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide to restore the pre-upgrade database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the DBINVALID condition is present as a result of the replacement of the unit, then
follow the appropriate procedure in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning
Guide to restore the database to a Control Card (control hardware integrated into the
PSS-1 unit).
Note: It is crucial to have the backup database be a duplicate of the one running on
the NE prior to replacement. Any data not backed up will be lost and may result in
lost services and interruption in traffic.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Review of the NE logs may provide an indication of the corruption of the database via a
failed audit function resulting in CRC errors. If the DBINVALID condition is present due
to a corruption of the database, then follow the appropriate procedure in the
Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to restore the database to the unit from a valid
database backup file.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DEG
DEG (Signal Degrade - ODU)
The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Path layer. This defect indicates that local
OTUk port has detected Path layer BER which exceeds 10-6
.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail
• Damaged or dirty receiver inside pluggable module
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects DEG condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the
operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the pluggable module.
Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EQPT
EQPT (Card Failure - Device)
The Card Failure - Device alarm text for the EQPT condition indicates a fault on the card
that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared
due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on the card
type the alarm is raised against. This is a critical service affecting alarm for cards carrying
traffic and affects the traffic currently flowing through the failed device
The Port Failure - Device alarm text indicates a port initialization failure on the network
ports (10G ports).
Severity Control card (integrated into PSS-1 shelf)- Major. All other
cards - Critical
Service affecting? Control card (integrated)- No. All other cards - Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5)
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If this
condition is raised against the alarm panel or a fan tray, then after each step perform a
warm reset of the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset
warm
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a card cold reset.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the alarm is against:
• A replaceable card — Replace the card. Follow the return and repair process to return
the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement. Go to Step 7.
• PSS1GBE, PSS1MD4, PSS1MSAH, or PSS1AHP card types —
Failure may be caused by a defective SFP or XFP, remove the SFP and XFP modules
and go to Step 2 to reset the shelf. If the removal and reset clears the EQPT condition
replace the defective SFP or XFP. Go to Step 7.
If removing the SFP or XFP modules and reseting does not clear the condition
replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the following steps for
the Unit Replacement procedure.
• EC card types — Replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the
following steps for the Unit Replacement procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Complete Procedure 3-1: “Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device”
(p. 3-6) through Procedure 3-13: “Set the network element date and time” (p. 3-40) in
Chapter 3, “Installation and System turn up” in this document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Configure and fiber the edge device to the original configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Follow the database restore procedure in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide document using the FORCE option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETR-MISMATCH (card)
A card that does not support ETR operation is installed in a chassis that is provisioned for
ETR operation.
Note: Operation of non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment can result
in hardware damage.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, EC-1-1, PF-1-{2,3},
SFC-1-{4,5},
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the PSS-1 unit has been provisioned for ETR status appropriate for the
environment (ETR for ETR environment - non-ETR for non-ETR environment).
If configured ETR in non-ETR environment. Disable ETR configuration with the “config
general” command and go to Step 5.
Note: If ETR provisioning is disabled, there will be no ETR-MISMATCH alarms for
non-ETR hardware in an ETR environment. It is then possible for hardware damage
to occur, even though there are no alarms.
If configured non-ETR in an ETR environment. Reconfigure for ETR operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the alarm has been raised by a replaceable card. If so, proceed to the next step.
Alarm Clearing Procedures ETR-MISMATCH (card)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-19
If the alarm has been raised by a non-replaceable unit (PSS-1 OT or EC), replace the
entire PSS-1 unit and go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify the card that is currently installed is not capable of supporting ETR operation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove the card and replace it with one that is ETR-capable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Alarm Clearing Procedures ETR-MISMATCH (card)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FACTERM-DEV
FACTERM-DEV (SFP SEEP Failure)
The SFP SEEP Failure condition is raised when the system cannot communicate with the
SFP to determine such information as power level and laser types. This condition is
equivalent to a port degrade, and service is not impacted until/unless a subsequent reset
occurs.
Severity Major
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Carefully remove and re-seat the SFP that is reporting the FACTERM-DEV condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove and cap the fiber jumpers connected to the SFP unit and replace the SFP with
another unit of the same type. Reconnect the fiber jumpers as they were before.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset.
Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-21
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLOS
FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
The Far End OT port has detected LAN LOS at its input.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT
Severity Not Alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELALOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end client OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-32).
Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-23
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELANLSS
FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)
Far End OT port has detected LA Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization at its input.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT
Severity Not Alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLSS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end client OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLSS” (p. 7-33).
Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FELOS
FELOS (Far End Loss of Signal)
The Far End OT port has detected a CBRAR signal (e.g. FE or HD-DSI LOS) at a client
port input.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end
• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT
Severity Not Alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end client OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-32).
Alarm Clearing Procedures FELOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-25
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FEPORTMISMATCH
FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)
The Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm text for the FEPORTMISMATCH condition
indicates two client ports assigned to a protection group are not provisioned the same.
Time slot assignments are wrong, such that a service does not appear on the same client
ports at the two ends of a point-to-point link. Or corresponding ports at the two ends are
not provisioned for the same signal rate and format. The condition is listed against the
near end port.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the two ports in the protection group at the near end, and the two ports at the far
end.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Provision the near end and far end ports with the same signal rate and format. When client
signals are not GBE, the ODU0INTERWK parameter must be set to DISABLE. ODU0
interworking is only valid for GbE traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Provision the timeslot assignments so that the same ports are used at both ends. For
example, the near end port C3 must be connected to far end port C3.
Alarm Clearing Procedures FEPORTMISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWBK
FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)
This is a standing condition indicating that a forced switch back to the working is active.
The forced switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
forced switch to work request within a protection group. A forced switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail state.
Clearing the manual switch clears the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared forced switch back to work leaves the switch position on work.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI show aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-27
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
FRCDWKSWPR
FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating a forced switch to protect is active.
The forced switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a forced switch to protect request within a protection group. A forced switch
to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in
the signal fail state. A forced switch to protect also prevents reversion to the working path
from occurring. Clearing the forced switch clears the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch occurs to the work facility immediately after the forced
switch has cleared.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the forced switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTEMP [over]
INTEMP (Card over temperature)
A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,
fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed
sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature
(measured by temperature sensors on the card).
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
Note: It may take many minutes for any corrective actions to lower the temperature.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that no fan alarms. Correct any faults found.
CLI show fan * alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the 1354RM-PhM or web interface to verify the speed of each of the fans in the shelf.
Normal fan speed is between 3000 and 3500 RPM; in the event of a temperature fault or
fan failure the remaining fan speeds will automatically increase to over 4000 RPM. If the
fan speed is in the normal range while the high temperature alarm is active, contact your
service representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that all filler cards are installed in all empty slots in
the unit. This helps ensure proper airflow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check for a dirty air filter. Replace it as necessary. Do not clean or wash the filter; use a
new one. Contact your service representative for replacement filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify
that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too
high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating
temperature.
Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-29
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10°C).
CLI show card <sh/sl>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
INTEMP [under]
INTEMP (Card under temperature)
The card temperature is below operational limits. There may be a climate control or
sensor failure. This alarm is raised when the card is under the specified operating
temperature (measured by temperature sensors on the card). The network element
requires additional heating to bring it back to an acceptable operating temperature.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure that no environmental issues are present where the network element resides.
Resolve any existing issues.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their lower limit (within 10° C).
CLI show card <sh/sl>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [under]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-31
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLOS
LANLOS (LAN port LOS)
OT port has detected LOS on Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel facility. This defect
indicates loss of optical power at the input of the local LAN port.
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLOS condition on an OT
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine fiber and connector to the local port input.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clean the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If fiber is damaged or cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for
detected alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the pluggable module.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANLSS
LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)
LAN LSS is caused by dirty fiber or wrong signal feed into the GbE port (e.g., OC192).
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To clear it, one should clean the fiber or correct the signal sent from upstream equipment.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-33
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCK
LCK (Locked - OTU)
OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that
network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the ODUk
payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused insertion
of LCK maintenance signal.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
11STAR1 client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LCK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LFD
LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)
An OT port has detected a Loss of GFP frame Delineation. This defect indicates that the
bit stream in the payload area used for GFP transport has degraded to the point where the
boundaries of GFP frames can no longer be reliably detected.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• A failure in the OCh trail used for transporting GFP layer
• A malfunction of the source or sync. GFP function
Severity SA
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Inspect the OCh trail which is used as a server transport layer for GFP stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If any alarms are detected on OCh trail, locate the farthest upstream point and follow the
procedure for clearing this alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Locate the far end OT that sources the GFP stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a soft reset of both local and far-end OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If Step 4 does not clear the problem replace far-end OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If Step 5 does not clear the problem replace the local OT.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LFD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-35
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LINKDOWN
LINKDOWN (Link down)
The Ethernet link between devices is out of service. This alarm is raised in the following
conditions:
• On Ethernet ports with auto-negotiation enabled when the Ethernet link is down.
Severity Control card (integrated): Not alarmed
10GigE: Critical
Service affecting? Control card (integrated): No
10GigE: Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{C1-C4}, EC-1-1, FAN-1-6-LAN1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Trace the source of the LINKDOWN condition to the associated card and port upstream.
Verify that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state
is Up, then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.
EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card’s
client receive port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the fiber from the port where the LINKDOWN condition is raised and clean the
fiber and the bulkhead connector.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Repeat Step 2 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the fiber jumper with a new one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Re-seat the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Re-seat the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Replace the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present
Tips to perform the Corrective action
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the source is operational up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check that the cable/fibre is plugged in correctly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check that the other end is plugged into a matching Ethernet source.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-37
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that cable/fibre is the correct type for the Ethernet port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If a cable/fibre tester is available check that the cable/fibre is correct, otherwise try
another cable/fibre.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card cold reset.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)
The Lockout Of Protection condition occurs when a user initiates a lockout switch request
within a protection group.
A lockout forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment and prevents protection
switching from occurring. Clearing the lockout will again allow protection switching to
take place and will result in the lockout condition being cleared.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Observe from the condition statement the location of the protection group member that
has the active condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a
service” (p. 8-2) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card
reporting the LOCKOUTOFPR alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to determine the
identity of the protection group involved in the active condition.
CLI show aps group *
Note the APS group ID / AIDs of the APS group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the following command on both the near-end and far-end NEs and verify that the
protection path is alarm free. Use the group ID/AID identified in Step 4.
CLI show aps group <x>
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-39
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Determine if there are any outstanding alarms on the system pertaining to the service.
CLI alm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clear all of the active alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Clear the lockout request.
CLI config aps group [x] clear
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF
LOF (Loss Of Frame)
A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a Loss Of Frame. The LOF alarm
is raised if:
• the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2 overhead bytes as per the
SONET specification
• the OTN framer detects corruption in the Framing Alignment Signal (FAS) bytes.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• an improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber
• the received power may not be within the acceptable range
• the data rate may be inconsistent
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}
Use the following procedure for a Client Port LOF:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query for the optical receive power on the port where the LOF condition is present.
CLI show interface shelf slot port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port that it is connected to. Check that the
source is a compatible type with the same line rate as expected at the receive port. Also
verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end
of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (refer to the source
equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical
power meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the
output power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-41
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
CLI config interface OT_pack shelf slot port state
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOF is raised and measure the optical
power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required
threshold,
using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
the optical power is within the required
limits,
clean the receive connector on the card.
If the LOF condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card warm reset of the OT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the client port has an SFP or XFP installed, verify the SFP or XFP (this includes
checking the SFP or XFP and replacing if necessary; do this before cold reset or re-seat as
it does not affect other client signals).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a cold reset of the OT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure for a Network LOF:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-4) to identify the probable network
trouble-point for the light-path. The procedure guides the user through the investigation
and resolution of the problem tracing back through to the source of the light path.
If the problem is the head end of the path (the transponder card at the source) then:
1. Check the add E for conditions against the OT port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source card network-facing port is administratively UP and
transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
CLI show interface shelf slot port (perform at both the near and far ends)
If encapsulation does not match, then configure the incorrect side to match up.
CLI config interface PSS1MD4 shelf slot
shelf slot/C1 tengige encmode [ cbrlan11.049 | cbrlan11.096 | gfp-f | gfp-p ]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that there are no channel alarms or conditions for this channel on the near-end E.
If there are, clear them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Query for the optical receive power on the network port where the LOF condition is
present.
CLI sh int shelf slot port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If... Then...
the optical power is below the required
threshold,
using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-43
If... Then...
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Confirm that the drop path is fibered correctly:
1. Confirm that the network port of the transponder is fibered to the appropriate port on
the appropriate OT.
2. Confirm that the mux port of the OT is fibered to the appropriate port on the
appropriate CWR8.
3. Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the alarmed port.
4. Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other
end of the fiber is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a line loopback on the far end network port. If this resolves the local (near-end)
alarm then the problem is associated with the far end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Perform a card warm reset of the transponder card.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a card cold reset of the transponder card.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-44 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOFEGR
LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress)
An OT port has detected Loss of Frame on CBR2G5 (transparent OC48/STM16) or
CBR10G (transparent STM64) service transported over OTUk in transmit direction.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input.
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end.
Severity NA
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LOFEGR declared on an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate far end OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LOF” (p. 7-41) on the far end port.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOFEGR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-45
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOM
LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)
This alarm is raised at an OT port when the OT receiver cannot synchronize to a
multiframe indicator of an incoming OTUk bit stream.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver
• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on OT port input
• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the OT
• Problem at the upstream OT
Severity Major
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying services.
If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting or replacing the unit.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOM declared on an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOM condition is present.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/port>
If the power is below a minimum threshold, the problem may be upstream from that port.
Visually inspect the OT port connection. Ensure that there are no loose fibers. If so,
connect the fiber properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the immediate upstream OT for any alarm conditions. If there are any, clear the
failures.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-46 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a card warm reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the OT. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-47
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS
LOS (Loss of signal)
The corrective actions for the loss of signal condition are dependent upon the AID where
the condition is raised. The procedure addresses each of these.
The LOS can be against a client or network port. The following procedures address both
possibilities.
• LOS against a Network Port
• LOS against a Client Port
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability EC-1-1
SFC-1-{4, 5}-OMD
PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
LOS against a Client Port:
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Query the optical receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.
CLI show int<shelf/slot/port>
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-48 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
the power is below the minimum threshold, the problem is upstream from that port.
Continue with Step 3.
the power is within acceptable limits, the problem is with the card itself. Proceed to
Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port and that it is on. Check that the source
is a compatible type (for example, if you are expecting a single-mode fiber signal (either
1310 or 155x nm), check that the source is not a multi-mode fiber signal (typically 850
nm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Note: Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to
source equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove
the fiber from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using
an optical power meter.
If... Then...
the output power is within
acceptable limits,
continue with Step 5.
the output power is not within
acceptable limits,
the problem is with the source. Follow the instructions on
debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
CLI show int<shelf/slot/port>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Note: Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure
the optical power.
If... Then...
the optical power is below the required
threshold,
using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning
procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the
power again.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-49
If... Then...
the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the unit.
If the LOS condition is still present, the problem may be with the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a warm reset of the unit exhibiting the Loss of Signal.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove the SFP from the port on the unit in which it is inserted. Examine the connector
on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the unit where the SFP plugs into for any
damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the
connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Perform a cold reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-50 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOS against a Network Port:
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the “Path power trace” (p. 8-4) procedure to identify the probable network
trouble-point for the light-path. If after investigating, the source of the problem is the
head end of the path (the transponder at the source) then:
1. Check the Add NE for conditions against the SFC-OMD port and resolve any issues.
2. Verify that the source network-facing port is administratively UP and transmitting.
3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,
verify that the light source is compatible.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the
same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the
encapsulation mode is the same for both).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to source
equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber
from the transmit port of the source and verify the output power using an optical power
meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the output
power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the
instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-51
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the
administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.
CLI show int<shelf/slot/port>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical
power. If the optical power is below the required threshold, clean the fiber, and measure
the power again. If the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive
connector on the unit. If the LOS condition is still present, the problem is in the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a warm reset of the head end transponder and source exhibiting the Loss of
Signal.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Remove the SFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the connector
on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP plugs into for any
damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the
connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Perform a card cold reset.
Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-52 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-53
LOS-P
LOS-P (Loss of Signal - OTU)
The OT port has detected an Optical Channel Loss of Signal Failure.
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk receive
port and the far end transmitter
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Note: When a cross-connect is added, the LOS-P alarm is raised for ports A and B,
and then clears after a few seconds.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Corrective action
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOS-P declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 2 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-54 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-55
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKLINE
LPBKLINE (Line (Facility) Loopback Active)
A line loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may only
be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}, EC-1-1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback line disabled
Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKLINE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-56 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LPBKTERM
LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)
A terminal loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may
only be cleared by manually removing them from the port.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Remove the loopback from the port.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback
terminal disabled
Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKTERM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-57
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance)
The MAN (card in maintenance) condition is raised on a card when the user has
purposefully placed the card into the maintenance state. Entities in maintenance still
provide service but don’t report alarms. They monitor for faults and raise non-reported
conditions. The maintenance state provides access to service affecting commands like
port loopbacks.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8), FAN-1-6 , SFC-1-(4,5), EC-1-1
PSS1AHP-{1-8}-7, FAN-1-6, EC-1-1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the card in service using the following command:
CLI config slot<shelf/slot> state up
Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-58 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance)
The MAN (port in maintenance) condition is raised on a specific port on a card when the
user has purposefully placed the port into the maintenance state.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Manually place the port in service using the following command:
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/port> state up
Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-59
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWBK
MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)
This is a standing condition indicating that a manual switch back to the working is active.
The manual switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a
manual switch to work request within a protection group. A manual switch to working
forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the
Signal-Fail or Signal-Degrade state.
Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. In the absence of other outstanding
requests, a cleared manual switch back to work will leave the switch position on work.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)-C{1-4}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the manual switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWBK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-60 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MANWKSWPR
MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating a manual switch to protect is active.
The manual switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a
user initiates a manual switch to protect request within a protection group. A manual
switch to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect
facility is in the signal fail or signal degrade state. A manual switch to protect also
prevents reversion to the working path from occurring. Clearing the manual switch will
clear the condition.
If reversion is enabled, a switch will occur to the work facility immediately after the
manual switch has cleared.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)-C{1-4}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the manual switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-61
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
MISMATCH
MISMATCH (SFP Mismatch)
The SFP mismatch alarm is raised when the SFP unit inserted into a transponder card is of
a different type that is not a match for the card.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1, L2}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Note: Verify the type of SFP that is currently inserted into the alarmed card.
If... Then...
the inserted SFP module is the incorrect type, remove the module and insert one that matches
the card type.
the inserted SFP module is the correct type, remove the module and re-seat it back into the
card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the SFP and replace it with another SFP of the same type.
Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-62 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair
Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-63
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
NET (Link Down)
The 1830 Edge Device reports this condition against the FAN port, LAN1. The NET
condition is raised when the Ethernet port has been administratively enabled and Ethernet
Link connectivity is lost.
Severity MN
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-C{1-4}, FAN-1-6-LAN1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify provisioned servers are valid and reachable. If not, consult network engineering for
correct server addresses.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the unit.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the unit.
Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the PSS-1 unit with the integrated controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC
condition. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures NET
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-64 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCI
Open Connection Indication - ODU
OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This
defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has not
provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OTN switched network. OCI
maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.
This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has deleted or not
yet provisioned a connection in OTN switched network.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCI condition declared on an
OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to
11STAR1 client port to clear the OCI.
Alarm Clearing Procedures OCI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-65
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLM
PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)
PLM(ODU) won't happen within 1830-to-1830 NE connections (PSS-1 and/or PSS-32).
However, it could happen when a non-1830 NE's 10G LAN signal is connected to an
1830 NE, and is not configured correctly.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To correct this, make sure the other NE sends out an OTU1 signal with PSI byte set to
0x80.
Alarm Clearing Procedures PLM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-66 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRCDRERR-TOPO
PRCDRERR (Invalid topology)
In this release, the system enforces a rule that a valid cross connect must terminate on one
of the following endpoints:
• a port marked as “External”
• a port marked as “No-connect”
• a transponder network port
In prior releases, there were no checks in place to prevent cross connects that do not
adhere to these rules. Therefore, if there are any cross connects already in place from a
previous release that do not adhere to the rules, this condition is raised on the NE in this
release after an upgrade from a previous release.
Services that are running over invalid cross connects may continue to operate, in which
case it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before performing this procedure,
or they may be interrupted, in which case a loss of service alarm is raised.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the cross connects on the NE, and look for cross connects that do not conform to
the rules. These cross connects are considered invalid.
Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-67
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Delete the invalid connections. Any service that is running over an invalid cross connect
that is deleted is interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Recreate valid cross connects for the interrupted services.
Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-68 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PWR
PWR (Battery off or power filter off)
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PF-1-{2,3}
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-69
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Plug in the power filter in the appropriate slot and turn on the power.
Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-70 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNTMISS
REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)
The card missing condition is raised when a provisioned slot, that has both a programmed
card-type and an Admin state of In-Service, does not have a card in it. The slot has been
provisioned as such and no card has been inserted, or an inserted In-Service card has been
physically removed from that slot.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-{4,5}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that there is a card in the slot against which the alarm is raised. If no card is
present, insert a card of the provisioned type into the slot. To verify which card type has
been provisioned for the slot:
CLI show int<shelf/slot>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If... Then...
a card is present, remove the card and check for damage to the shelf’s backplane
pins and to the card’s backplane connector.
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-71
If... Then...
damage is found on the
shelf’s backplane,
arrange for repair to the backplane. Do not attempt to reinsert
the card.
damage is found on the card,
but not on the backplane,
send the card for repair. Replace the damaged card with another
one of the same type, into the same slot.
no damage is found on either
the backplane or the card,
replace the card with another one of the same type into the
same slot. If the Card Missing alarm clears, send the original
card for repair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the Card Missing alarm does not clear, remove the alarmed card and arrange for repair
to the backplane. Follow the return and repair process to return the damaged card or shelf
to an authorized repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-72 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
REPLUNITMISSMOD
REPLUNITMISS (SFP/XFP Missing)
The optics module SFP/XFP for the port is missing or the card is not able to successfully
detect the presence of the module. The problem could be with the SFP/XFP or the card.
Typically, this alarm is raised if the SFP/XFP module is not installed or not properly
seated.
Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)
Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If there is no SFP/XFP in the port where the SFP/XFP missing condition is raised, then
insert one that is appropriate for that transponder card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the connector
on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP plugs into
for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-73
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with
the connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP failure is raised.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISSMOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-74 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSF
SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)
The OT port has detected an Optical Channel (Och) Server Signal Failure. A condition
that is treated as a Server Signal Failure (i.e., a Loss of Signal, LOS) was detected. Each
of the following conditions is treated as a Server Signal Failure:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk
receive port and the far end transmitter
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity Not reported
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSF declared on an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-75
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of PSS1MD4 OT, and the power level is
within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the pluggable module.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-76 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SSFODU
SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)
The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level. Conditions that can
cause an SSFODU are:
• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)
• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)
• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)
• ODU-AIS
These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:
• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk
receive port and the far end transmitter
• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail
• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input
Severity Not reported
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODU declared on an OT
port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and
verify the power levels along the OCh trail.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power
level falls within the expected range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately
upstream from point identified in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-77
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber
connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODU condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Clean the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the
operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace the pluggable module.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-78 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SWFTDWN
SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress)
Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the E. This alarm is active if
the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to
commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM; PSS1GBE-1-7
SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
Corrective Action
The corrective action depends on whether you want to commit the software upgrade, or
back out of the software upgrade. The alarm clears when a commit or a back out is issued
after the software upgrade is complete.
For more details on the upgrade process, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide .
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWFTDWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-79
SWUPGFAIL
SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)
The SWUPGFAIL alarm is applicable at the NE-level and/or the card-Level. This alarm is
raised when the NE or card fails to upgrade to the designated load.
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-7
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine the reason why the NE or card failed to upgrade.
CLI config software upgrade status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Based on the information provided by the status, as listed in the following table,
determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first.
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions
Upgrade status Action
Transfer failed This is an internal error indicating a failure between the
CC and another card. Retry the upgrade process.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-80 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
File access failed Problem accessing the load file on the CC disk. Retry the
upgrade process.
File corruption detected during
transfer
Retry the upgrade process.
Timeout The upgrade timed out. Retry the upgrade process.
Operation in progress No action required.
Install in progress No action required.
Transfer in progress Attempted to do an upgrade while SWL was busy.
1. Wait for the action to complete, or abort the current
action (config software abort).
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Card not found A card was removed while an upgrade was in progress.
Retry again (with or without the missing card).
Card type not found in catalog The software release does not contain a software load for
the card.
1. Check that you are upgrading to the correct software
load. Retry with the correct load.
2. If you are upgrading to the correct load, determine if
the card in question is required for normal operations.
3. If the card is not required, remove the card from the
system.
4. If the card is required for normal operation, contact
your service representative.
Lost communication with target The card experienced a temporary communications
problem. Retry the upgrade process.
Flash read failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
banks.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
Flash write failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
banks.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question
Flash erase failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash
banks.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-81
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
DB erase failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB read failed Retry the upgrade process.
DB write failed Database access failure.
1. Retry the upgrade process.
2. If the retry fails, then replace the CC card in question.
TFTP server ip address not set Set the IP address of the TFTP server.
Failed to access catalog Retry the upgrade process.
TFTP server error Ensure that the server is up and running correctly.
TFTP network error There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
3. Retry the upgrade process.
TFTP timeout There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.
1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.
2. Check and correct network connectivity.
3. Retry the upgrade process.
No upgrade path There was an attempt to upgrade to a release which is not
backwards compatible with the current release.
1. Upgrade to an intermediate release first.
2. Once the intermediate load is accomplished, retry the
upgrade process to the final upgrade release.
Operation aborted The upgrade was manually aborted. Retry the upgrade
process.
Invalid script The audit was unable to produce a valid upgrade script.
Retry the upgrade process.
Load and bank are incompatible An attempt was made to load a boot load in an
application bank, or vice versa. This is an invalid
operation. Application loads can only be loaded into
application banks; boot loads can only be loaded into
boot banks. Perform the upgrade but this time specify the
correct bank.
Backup and restore host IP not set Set the backup and restore host IP address.
Database backup failed Retry the upgrade process.
Database restore failed Retry the upgrade process.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-82 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Couldn’t find database to restore There is a problem with the database backup server, or
the connectivity to the server or the database server
configuration.
1. Check and correct the database backup server
configuration.
2. Check and correct DCN network connectivity.
Confirm that the TFTP server can accept ping
commands (config tools ping <TFTP server>)
3. Check and correct the status of database server.
4. Retry the upgrade process once the previous steps are
complete.
Attempted activate before load Retry the upgrade process.
Bank is empty Retry the upgrade process.
Load not found on card An attempt was made to activate a bank with an incorrect
or missing software load.
1. Reload the software.
2. Activate the load.
Load file not found A software load file could not be found on the disk.
Repeat the upgrade to transfer the file from FTP to the
disk.
Load could not be activated The correct load could not be activated.
Retry the upgrade process.
Operation interrupted by reset Card was reset while upgrade was underway.
1. Wait for the reset of card to complete.
2. Log into NE (if required).
3. Retry the upgrade process.
Software version mismatch A commit failed because not all cards were running the
same software release. This error is not the cause of an
upgrade failure alarm.
Repeat the upgrade process.
Activity switch failed The CCs failed to switch activity, so the upgrade cannot
continue.
1. Resolve redundancy issues.
2. Retry the upgrade process.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-83
Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)
Mate CC unable to take activity The inactive CC was unable to take activity, so the
upgrade cannot continue.
1. Resolve redundancy issues.
2. Retry the upgrade process.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a card warm reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade
procedure again.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure
again.
Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Follow the
return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair center for
replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Contact your service representative.
Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-84 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIM
TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the
expected section trace. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the
section trace, or an error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition
(Network Ports) the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.
This alarm is raised if:
• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)
• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI
Mismatch)
• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)
TIM (Client Ports)
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset or replacement of a the unit is service impacting if the unit is currently
carrying services.
If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check that the section trace configuration of the client port is correct:
CLI show interface <card> <shelf/slot/port>
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-85
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If there are errors in the provisioned section trace correct them.
CLI config interface <card> <shelf/slot/port> sectTrace
expectedTrace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check the SONET device generating the section trace, connected to the client port that is
raising the TIMS alarm, and verify its configuration. If there are errors in the provisioning
of the section trace transmit state, mode or message, correct them. Refer to that device's
user manual.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify that the physical fibering between the client port and the SONET device is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card warm reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card cold reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.
Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)
Severity Minor
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-86 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset or replacement of a unit is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying
services.
If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify that the physical fibering between the network receive port of the transponder and
the output port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-2) to determine the
NE and location of the transponder at the other end of this service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify that the physical fibering between the network transmit port of the transponder and
the input port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a warm reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem
does not clear then perform a warm reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit
raising the TIM condition.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a cold reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem
does not clear then perform a cold reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit
raising the TIM condition.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the alarmed unit. If the problem does not clear then replace the associated far-end
card. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair
center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-87
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIMODU
TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)
This alarm is raised when the incoming optical channel trail trace message does not match
the expected incoming optical channel trail trace message.
This may be caused by the following reasons:
• Mis-fibering
• Improper provisioning
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Failure to follow instructions in this step could result in SERVICE INTERRUPTION.
Notify the person in charge of the optical line so that traffic can be re-routed.
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the TIMODU alarm declared on
an OT port.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Examine the NE alarm list. Determine the AID of the OT reporting this alarm condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check the local office records. Determine if the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal matches the data in the expected incoming ODU trail trace message listed
for the report.
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal matches the data in the expected
incoming ODU trail trace message listed for
the report
Continue with Step 3.
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-88 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
If... Then...
the correct expected ODU trail trace message
for this signal does not match the data in the
expected incoming ODU trail trace message
listed for the report
Proceed to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 At the user interface, obtain an updated alarm report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Trace the fiber jumper connected to the line port of the OT identified in the AID, back to
the source OT. If the jumper fiber is connected to the correct source, go to Step 6.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use local procedures to connect the fiber jumper to the correct source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If the alarm is still listed in the NE alarm list, then at the user interface, enter the correct
expected incoming ODU trail trace message. The TIMODU alarm should clear.
Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-89
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRMT
TRMT (SFP or XFP Transmit Failure)
The SFP or XFP Failure condition is raised at the SFP or XFP equipment and indicates a
fault on the transmit port of the SFP or XFP. This is usually a laser failure where light is
not detected at the transmit port.
Severity Critical.
Service affecting? Yes.
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, EC-1-1
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the SFP or XFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the
connector on the SFP or XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP or
XFP plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP or XFP into its
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the SFP or XFP with another unit of the same type, being careful
with the connected fiber jumpers.
Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-90 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP or XFP failure is raised.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-91
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)
The system does not recognize the inserted card. An unsupported card type, or faulty card
is present. This alarm is raised when a card has been inserted but never establishes
communications with the controller.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5)
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify if the inserted card is supported for the current running release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the card is not yet supported in this release and the card is a required type for the NE,
verify that the correct release is running on the NE. Upgrade the NE to the correct release
if it is not to support this card type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the NE is running the correct release but the card is not yet supported in that release,
remove the card and replace it with one that is supported by the software running on the
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If the card is supported and the NE is running the correct release, the problem may be
with the card itself.
Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-92 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card cold reset.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized
repair
UNKNOWN (SFP/XFP Unknown)
The optics module SFP/XFP inserted in the port is of a type that is not recognized and the
system cannot obtain manufacturing information on the unit. There is a possibility that the
SFP/XFP is damaged and the card is not able to correctly identify the module or that there
is damage on the card preventing correct identification of the SFP/XFP.
Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)
Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, EC-1-1
Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-93
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the
connector on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP
plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type. Take special care
when handling the connected fiber jumpers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP defect is raised.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit.
Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-94 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPM
UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)
The OT has detected a GFP User Payload Mismatch. This condition is raised when the
encapsulation mode provisioning for the two OTs on opposite ends of an optical link do
not match.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? Yes
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}
This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the GFP User Payload Mismatch
on an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Locate the OT with the UPM defect. Verify the encapsulation mode value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the OT at the opposite end of the link. Ensure that the provisioning for the
encapsulation mode parameter is the same for each OT.
Alarm Clearing Procedures UPM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-95
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
USALS
USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff due to Upstream Fault)
USALS is raised when the client port laser is turned off either because the network port of
this card has an optical LOS, or the corresponding client port at the far end of the service
has a fault.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1,4}
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A cold reset or replacement of a unit is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying
services.
If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a
maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or re-seating it.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that
has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look
for LOS, LOC or LOF at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the associated
client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If the desired behavior at the near end client port is to inject an Alarm Indication Signal
(AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to shut the laser off in reaction to the
upstream fault, issue the following command at the near end to change the LOSProp
(LOS Propagation) setting.
CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] losprop [injectAISL
| idleFrames | invalidSig]
Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-96 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Using the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-2), determine the nature
of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type alarms at the associated
client port(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.
If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Perform a card warm reset.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Perform a card cold reset.
Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.
CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an
authorized repair center for replacement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Repeat Step 6 to Step 8 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.
Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-97
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[high]
VOLTAGE[high] (high input voltage defect)
The voltage level of the external DC supply is high. This alarm is raised if there is too
much voltage going to the breaker feed or the voltage is above the threshold. This could
be due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? No
Applicability EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (see “Power filter input” (p. 2-77)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to
return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[high]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-98 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOLTAGE[low]
VOLTAGE [low] (low input voltage defect)
Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been
turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the
voltage is below the threshold. This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or due to a
problem with the power feed to the breaker card.
Severity Critical
Service affecting? No
Applicability EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it not, go to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within
the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.
CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to
return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.
Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[low]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-99
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR
WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)
This is a standing condition indicating that the protection facility/equipment is active.
This condition is raised only when reversion is enabled.
If the working facility/equipment is error-free then the condition automatically clears
once the wait-to-restore timer has expired.
Severity Not alarmed
Service affecting? No
Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}
The action required to clear this condition depends on whether or not there are
outstanding problems against the working facility/equipment.
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If there
are no faults against working facility/equipment:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Initiate a manual switch to work.
CLI config aps group <group> manualSwitchtoWorking
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clear the manual switch.
CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch
If there are faults against working facility/equipment:
At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-100 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Resolve the fault(s) against working facility/equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.
CLI config aps group <group> detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Initiate a lockout of protect.
CLI config aps group <group> lockout
Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
7-101
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-102 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
8 8Supporting Procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter lists the following troubleshooting procedures for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
Edge Device that are used in more than one trouble-clearing procedure.
Contents
Determining the far end of a service 8-2
Performing loopbacks 8-3
Path power trace 8-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
8-1
Determining the far end of a service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Check the OCh Trail name for the near end of the service.
CLI show xc brief
Search for the <shelf/slot/port> corresponding to the card and port in question. This will
provide the information required to proceed to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Perform a trace to determine the far end of the OChTrail.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the output of Step 2 to determine the far end of the service.
Supporting Procedures Determining the far end of a service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing loopbacks
For information and illustrations of loopbacks refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and Planning
Guide.
The following table lists the loopbacks that can be performed:
Card Loopbacks
PSS1MD4 • client port facility loopback
• client port terminal loopback
• network port facility loopback
• network port terminal loopback
Note: To create a loopback on a card using the CLI, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
Attention: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the
card.
Supporting Procedures Performing loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
8-3
Path power trace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a power trace of any affected paths.
CLI alm
sh condition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Locate the first point along the path at which power out of range or absent is observed, or
there is a significant difference between expected and observed power. This point is
referred to as the "First point of concern" in this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Examine the alarms close to the first point of concern.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Troubleshoot the alarms, concentrating on the points adjacent to the first point of concern.
The problem is most likely located between the first point of concern and the detection
point immediately upstream from it.
Note: It may take several seconds after corrective actions have been applied for
channel missing, channel absent, and power out of range alarms to clear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure that the relevant connection exists and is administratively up at the first point of
concern and at the point immediately upstream from it.
CLI show xc brief
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Examine the output for the connection of the appropriate band and channel. If the
connection exists then check the admin states of the connection and associated ports.
CLI show xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>
<channel> trace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If the connection or ports are admin down then the entities must be brought admin up in
order to clear the alarm(s).
Supporting Procedures Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
To bring a connection admin up:
CLI config xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>
<channel> state up
If this clears the problem, go to Step 12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 If this connection terminates on a transponder then confirm that the associated client port
is administratively up.
CLI show interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If the client port is admin down then it must be brought admin up in order to clear the
alarm(s).
CLI config interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort> state up
If this clears the problem, go to Step 12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check that the programmed topology matches the actual topology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 If there are multiple alarms at the same point of interest, attempt to resolve the amplifier
alarms first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Stop. You have completed this procedure.
Supporting Procedures Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
8-5
E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supporting Procedures Path power trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A access identifier (AID)
A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)
A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)
A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
alarm indication signal (AIS)
A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-1
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)
Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is
designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to
avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)
A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route
when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)
A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By
applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B back reflection
See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-12).
background block errors (BBE)
Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.
backward defect indication (BDI)
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)
A band-dependent optical card.
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
BB
See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-3
BBE
See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.
bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)
A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)
BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many
bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)
Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C CAD
See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.
central office (CO)
A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
channel add/drop card (CAD)
Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)
COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CIT
See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)
Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet
mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are
not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the
original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.
CLEI
See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CN
See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CO
See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-5
COF
See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.
common language element identifier (CLEI)
CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)
The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
coupling ratio/loss (CR)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CR
See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.
craft interface terminal (CIT)
A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)
Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D data communication network (DCN)
DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management
system (NMS).
DCM
See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DCN
See “data communication network” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DHCP
See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)
Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -
Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)
A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E earth
The European term for electrical ground.
EC
See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.
EDFA
See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.
electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)
Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)
EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
Element Management System (EMS)
The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
EMC
See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
EMI
See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.”
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)
EC is the equipment controller card˙, in a chassis with replaceable controllers, or it is the
integrated control hardware in a PSS-1.
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
ETSI
See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-9
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
failure in time (FIT)
A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCC
See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-12) for definition.
FDA
See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FDI
See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable
A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
fiber optic connector (FC)
A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-10 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)
General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)
A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
FIT
See “failure in time” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flash disk memory module (FMM)
A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)
An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)
A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-11
FPGA
See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-11) for definition.
frame check sequence (FCS)
Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back
reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-11) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
gateway network element (GNE)
A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.
generic framing protocol (GFP)
Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)
A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.
graphical user interface (GUI)
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-12 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-12) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I ILA
See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.
in-line amplifier (ILA)
A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-23) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)
A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
Internet protocol (IP)
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)
A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-13
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)
A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
IP
See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)
See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISO
See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-14) for definition.
ITU
See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L lambda (λ)
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.
laser bias current (LBC)
Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBC
See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
LC
See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LD
See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)
Attenuation used to simulate a load.
line driver (LD)
An amplifier used to improve the strength of a signal at its source by driving the input of the
transmission line with an amplified signal.
link state advertisement (LSA)
A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.
LOF
See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.
long reach (LR)
An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)
Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)
A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LSA
See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Lucent connector (LC)
Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-15
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M MAC
See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.
management information base (MIB)
A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)
The system's master controller (MC) card.
MC
See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MD4H
A PSS-1 Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature
Hardened.
mean time between failures (MTBF)
The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
mean time to repair (MTTR)
The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)
The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)
An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTBF
See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NE
See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)
Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and
ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)
The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-17
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)
Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)
Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.
NMS
See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-17) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are viewed as a
single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the following:
• up to two single optical shelves
• a single electrical shelf
• a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)
Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O OA
See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-19) for definition.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)
OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
legislation.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
OCHAN or OCh
See “optical channel” (p. GL-19) for definition.
ODU
See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OOF
See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.
Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)
A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)
A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or
provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OPS
See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)
A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)
A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
within the context of one cell.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-19
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
optical demultiplexer (ODU)
Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.
optical path protection (OPP)
A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)
A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter
An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)
An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.
optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)
The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)
A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and
operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)
An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.
OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring
(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)
A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network”
(p. GL-28) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)
The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
OSC
See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-18) for definition.
OSI
See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See “optical transport network” (p. GL-20) for definition.
out of frame (OOF)
A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)
Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P PCS
See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-22) for definition.
performance monitoring (PM)
Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-21
photonic protection switch (PPS)
By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)
PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.
PM
See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-21) for definition.
PMD
See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
polarization dependent loss (PDL)
Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
PPS
See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-21) for definition.
protocol data unit (PDU)
A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-21) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q QoS
See “quality of service” (p. GL-22) for definition.
quality of service (QoS)
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-22 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830 PSS-32
shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)
Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)
Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-23
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See “request for comment” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RIP
See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-23) for definition.
ROADM
See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition.
routing information protocol (RIP)
RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S SA
See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See “storage area network” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SC
See “shelf controller” (p. GL-25) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SDH
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.
secure shell (SSH)
An encrypted method of transmitting data.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
service affecting (SA)
Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers or be used
internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFD
See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFP
See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.
shared risk group (SRG)
A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with cards. The shelf
provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The shelf is mounted
in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf
that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as
a single point in the network topology to the network management system. Connections between
nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)
The SC card in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-25
SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS-32 nodes and the NMS. The
SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS-32 control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
single-mode fiber (SMF)
A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)
An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-25) for definition.
software control of transmission (SCOT)
System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)
The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
SONET
See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-26 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
SONET wavelength service
The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the 1830 PSS-32
network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSH
See “secure shell” (p. GL-24) for definition.
SSMF
See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition.
ST
See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-27) for definition.
standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)
This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)
A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.
static filter, DWDM (SFD)
A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.
storage area network (SAN)
A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
STP
See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-25) for definition.
straight-tip connector (ST)
Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-27
STS, STS-n
See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition.
Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)
An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
SW generic
See “software generic” (p. GL-26) for definition.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)
The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T tap
The entry point into a system module.
target identifier (TID)
A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.
TCA
See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TCP
See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)
A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See “target identifier” (p. GL-28) for definition.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)
An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-29
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830 PSS-32
network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)
A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UDP
See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
UL
See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)
A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
• is path-specific as opposed to line specific
• does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
• requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.
user datagram protocol (UDP)
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V variable optical attenuator (VOA)
A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.
very short reach (VSR)
A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)
Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)
1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
VOA
See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W wave division multiplexing (WDM)
WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-31
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS-32 which allows for
the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS-32 network, and for the measuring of the
wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-31) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See “Web user interface” (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z ZIC (zero installation craft)
An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
GL-33
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
Index
B barred-hand symbol, 1-12
Battery off or power filter off,
6-47
BDI, 6-4
Backward Defect Indication,
7-4
BDI-ODU
Backward Defect Indication
ODU, 7-5
BDIODU, 6-5
Before you begin, 3-3
.............................................................
C Card failure
communication, 6-7
Card initializing, 6-6
Card missing, 6-48
Card over temperature, 6-22
Card provisioning
failure, 6-8
Card under temperature, 6-23
Card-Failure Device, 6-13
CARDINIT
Card Initializing, 7-6
Cleaning optical connectors, 4-15
Cleaning other optical
components, 4-19
CLI access, 3-29
configure GNE for management
system access, 3-43
configure system properties, 3-42
configure topological links, 3-50
Connect to Network Element
Web user interface (WebUI)/
CLI, 4-2
CONTCOM
Card Failure - Communication,
7-7
.............................................................
D danger, potential sources of, 1-4
Database invalid, 6-11
DATAFLT
Card Provisioning Failure, 7-9
DB Failure Local
copy creation of processing
failure, 6-9
DB Failure Transport
file transport failure, 6-10
DBFL
DB Failure Local - copy
creation of processing failure,
7-11
DBFT
DB Failure Transport - file
transport failure, 7-12
DBINVALID
Database invalid, 7-13
DEG
Signal Degrade - ODU, 6-12,
7-15
Design, 2-4
Determining the far end of a
service, 8-2
.............................................................
E Electrical Sub-Network
Connection Protection (ESCNP)
Provision, 4-6
electrostatic discharge, 1-4, 1-11
EQPT
Card Failure - Device, 7-17
ESD, 1-11
ETR setting, 4-14
ETR-MISMATCH
card, 6-14, 7-19
example configuration of ftp
server, 3-52
.............................................................
F Facility loop active, 6-36
FACTERM-DEV
SFP SEEP Failure, 7-21
Feature, 2-12
FELANLOS, 6-16, 7-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
IN-1
FELANLSS, 6-17, 7-24
FELOS, 6-18, 7-25
FEPORTMISMATCH, 6-19, 7-26
Fiber cleaning, 4-15
FRCDWKSWBK, 6-20, 7-27
FRCDWKSWPR, 6-21, 7-28
.............................................................
G GCC network setup, 4-11
Glossary, GL-1
ground strap, ESD, 1-11
.............................................................
H High Input Voltage Defect, 6-61
.............................................................
I in-service fan replacement, 4-20
initialize database, 3-24
Inspecting optical connectors, 4-18
Installation and Provisioning of
1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device,
3-6, 3-11, 3-12
installation and seat packs, 3-23
INTEMP
over, 7-29
under, 7-31
Introduction, 2-2
Invalid topology, 6-46
.............................................................
L LAN1 Ethernet, 3-39
LANLOS, 6-24, 7-32
LANLSS, 6-25, 7-33
lasers
classes, 1-7
eye damage, 1-7
safety, 1-6
warning labels, 1-9
LC fiber removal, 3-22
LCK, 6-26
LFD, 6-27
Link Down, 6-28
LINKDOWN, 7-36
LOCKOUTOFPR, 6-29, 7-39
LOF, 6-30
Loss Of Frame, 7-41
LOFEGR, 6-32, 7-45
LOM, 6-33
Loss of Multiframe - OTU,
7-46
loopback IP address, 3-38
Loopbacks, 2-38
LOS
Loss of signal, 7-48, 7-54
OMD, 6-34
OTU, 6-35
Low Input Voltage Defect, 6-62
LPBKLINE
Line (Facility), 7-56
LPBKTERM
Diagnostic (Terminal), 7-57
.............................................................
M MAN
card in maintenance, 6-38,
7-58
port in maintenance, 6-38, 7-58
MANWKSWBK, 6-40, 7-60
MANWKSWPR, 6-41, 7-61
MISMATCH
SFP Mismatch, 7-62
multiservice muxponder, 2-18
.............................................................
N NE date and time, 3-40
NET, 6-43, 7-64
.............................................................
O OCI, 6-44
Open Connection Indication -
ODU, 7-65
Ordering, 2-63
.............................................................
P path power trace, 8-4
PC setup and provisioning, 4-4
Performance monitoring, 2-41
Performing loopbacks, 8-3
PLM, 6-45, 7-66
Port Provisioning, 4-9
potential sources of danger, 1-4
PRCDRERR-TOPO, 7-67
Protection
E-SNCP, 2-33
PWR
Battery off or power filter off,
7-69
.............................................................
R Reliability program, 2-49
REPLUNTMISS
Card Missing, 7-71
REPLUNTMISSMOD
missing module, 7-73
.............................................................
S safety instructions
electrostatic discharge, 1-11
general notes, 1-4
important, 1-13
laser, 1-6, 1-9
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
special, 1-4
safety precautions (enclosed
systems), 1-8
SDH mode, 3-37
SFP
SEEP failure, 6-15
transmit failure, 6-56
SFP module extraction, 3-20
SFP/XFP
mismatch, 6-42
missing module, 6-49
software environment, 3-31
Software installation, 4-5
Software Upgrade
Failed, 6-53
in Progress, 6-52
SSF, 6-50
Server Signal Failure - OTU,
7-75
SSFODU, 6-51
Server Signal Failure - ODU,
7-77
Status Retrieval, 2-45
SWFTDWN
Software Upgrade in Progress,
7-79
SWUPGFAIL
Software Upgrade Failed, 7-80
Synchronization, 2-47
System access, 2-46
.............................................................
T TCA profiles, 4-12
Technical specifications, 2-77
Terminal
loop active, 6-37
TIM, 6-54, 7-85
TIMODU, 6-55, 7-88
topologies, 2-27
TRMT
sfp, 6-56
SFP Transmit Failure, 7-90
.............................................................
U UNKNOWN
Card, 7-92
card unknown, 6-57
sfp/xfp unknown, 6-57
update firmware, 3-41
UPM, 6-59, 7-95
USALS, 6-60, 7-96
.............................................................
V verify system provisioning, 3-51
VOLTAGE
high input defect, 7-98
low input defect, 7-99
.............................................................
W warning labels, laser, 1-9
WKSWPR, 6-63, 7-100
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012
IN-3
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H
8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0
Issue 3 November 2012